FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
and are registered trademarks of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES, LTD.
copyright 2001 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this
manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its
operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such
as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the
dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest
SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this manu-
al are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY INDUS-
TRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and designs
at any time without prior notice and without incurring any obligation
to make the same or similar changes on vehicles previously sold.
This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and covers all equip-
ment, including factory installed options. Some explanations, there-
fore may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
i
– CONTINUED –
Warranties
B Warranties for U.S.A.
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of America, Inc. and sold
at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the United States come
with the following warranties:
D SUBARU Limited Warranty
D Emission Control Systems Warranty
D Emissions Performance Warranty
All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions,
is in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Please read these war-
ranties carefully.
B Warranties for Canada
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at
retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada come with the fol-
lowing warranties:
D SUBARU Limited Warranty
D Anti-Corrosion Warranty
D Emission Control Warranty
All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions,
is in the “Warranty and Service Booklet”. Please read these warranties
carefully.
NOTE
This vehicle does not contain mercury devices
or parts.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
ii
How to use this owner’s manual
J Using your Owner’s manual
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully read this manual. To protect
yourself and extend the service life of your vehicle, follow the instructions
in this manual. Failure to observe these instructions may result in serious
injury and damage to your vehicle.
This manual is composed of thirteen chapters. Each chapter begins with
a brief table of contents, so you can usually tell at a glance if that chap-
ter contains the information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbag
This chapter informs you how to use the seat and seatbelt and contains
precautions for the SRS airbag.
Chapter 2: Doors and Locks
This chapter informs you how to operate the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
This chapter informs you about the operation of instrument panel indica-
tors and how to use the instruments and other switches.
Chapter 4: Climate control
This chapter informs you how to operate the climate control.
Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you how to operate your audio system.
Chapter 6: Interior equipment
This chapter informs you how to operate interior equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and operating
This chapter informs you how to start and operate your SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving tips
This chapter informs you how to drive your SUBARU in various condi-
tions and explains some safety tips on driving.
Chapter 9: In case of emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you have a problem while driving,
such as a flat tire or engine overheating.
Chapter 10: Appearance care
This chapter informs you how to keep your SUBARU looking good.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
iii
– CONTINUED –
This chapter informs you how to keep your SUBARU running properly.
Chapter 12: Specifications
This chapter informs you about dimension and capacities of your
SUBARU.
Chapter 13: Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
This chapter informs you about Uniform tire quality grading standards
and Reporting safety defects.
Chapter 14: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in this manual. You can use it to
quickly find something you want to read.
J Safety warnings
You will find a number of WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this
manual.
These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards that could result in
injury to you or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well as all other portions of this
manual carefully in order to gain a better understanding of how to use
your SUBARU vehicle safely.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in which serious injury or death
could result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury or damage to
your vehicle, or both, could result if the caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or suggestions how to make better use of
your vehicle.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
iv
J Safety symbol
HS0008
You will find a circle with a slash through it in this manual. This symbol
means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”, depending
upon the context.
Safety precautions when driving
SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAG
WARNING
D All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BE-
FORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of se-
rious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or ac-
cident.
D To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the vehicle should always wear seat-
belts when the vehicle is moving. The SRS (Supplemental
Restraint System) airbag does not do away with the need to fas-
ten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best
combined protection in case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the car has the SRS airbag.
D The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
v
– CONTINUED –
deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS air-
bag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should al-
ways sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and
the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible
and sit upright and well back in the seat.
Carefully read the sections “Seatbelts” and “SRS airbag” in chapter 1 of
this owner’s manual for instructions and precautions concerning the
seatbelt system and SRS airbag system.
CHILD SAFETY
WARNING
D Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms while the ve-
hicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from in-
jury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the
passenger and objects inside the vehicle.
D While riding in the vehicle, infants and small children should
always be placed in the REAR seat in an infant or child restraint
system which is appropriate for the child’s age, height and
weight. If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child
should sit in the REAR seat and be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating
positions. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.
D Put children aged 12 and under in the REAR seat properly re-
strained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt. The
SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can
injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age
and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained. Be-
cause children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk being
injured from deployment is greater.
D NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
vi
THE SRS AIRBAG.
D Always use the child safety locks whenever a child rides in the
rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally
opened the door and fell out. Refer to the “Door locks” section in
chapter 2.
D Always lock the passenger’s windows using the lock switch
when children are riding in the vehicle. Failure to follow this pro-
cedure could result in injury to a child operating the power win-
dow. Refer to the “Power windows” section in chapter 2.
D Never leave unattended children in the vehicle. They could ac-
cidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent opera-
tion of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, temperature in a
closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause se-
vere or possibly fatal injuries to them.
Carefully read the sections “Child restraint systems”, “SRS airbag” and
“Seatbelts” in chapter 1 of this owner’s manual for instructions and pre-
cautions concerning the child restraint system, seatbelt system and SRS
airbag system.
ENGINE EXHAUST GAS (CARBON MONOXIDE)
WARNING
D Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is danger-
ous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
D Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to pre-
vent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
D Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, ex-
cept for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.
D Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventila-
tion fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.
D Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow,
leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system
always works properly.
D If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
vii
– CONTINUED –
vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as pos-
sible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all
windows fully open.
D Keep the rear gate closed while driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle.
DRINKING AND DRIVING
WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Alcohol in the
bloodstream delays your reaction and impairs your perception,
judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after drinking – even if
you drink just a little – it will increase the risk of being involved in
a serious or fatal accident, injuring or killing yourself, your pas-
sengers and others. In addition, if you are injured in the accident,
alcohol may increase the severity of that injury.
Please don’t drink and drive.
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Since
alcohol affects all people differently, you may have consumed too much
alcohol to drive safely even if the level of alcohol in your blood is below
the legal limit. The safest thing you can do is never drink and drive. How-
ever if you have no choice but to drive, stop drinking and sober up com-
pletely before getting behind the wheel.
DRUGS AND DRIVING
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the counter and prescription) that
can delay your reaction time and impair your perception, judg-
ment and attentiveness. If you drive after taking them, it may in-
crease your, your passengers’ and other persons’ risk of being
involved in a serious or fatal accident.
If you are taking any drugs, check with your doctor or pharmacist or read
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
viii
the literature that accompanies the medication to determine if the drug
you are taking can impair your driving ability. Do not drive after taking
any medications that can make you drowsy or otherwise affect your abil-
ity to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you have a medical condition that
requires you to take drugs, please consult with your doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence of any illicit mind-altering
drugs. For your own health and well-being, we urge you not to take ille-
gal drugs in the first place and to seek treatment if you are addicted to
those drugs.
DRIVING WHEN TIRED OR SLEEPY
WARNING
When you are tired or sleepy, your reaction will be delayed and
your perception, judgment and attentiveness will be impaired. If
you drive when tired or sleepy, your, your passengers’ and other
persons’ chances of being involved in a serious accident may in-
crease.
Please do not continue to drive but instead find a safe place to rest if you
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you should make periodic rest stops to
refresh yourself before continuing on your journey. When possible, you
should share the driving with others.
CAR PHONES AND DRIVING
CAUTION
A driver’s use of a car phone can be distracting and if special
care is not taken, can lead to an accident. If you use a car phone
while driving, make an extra effort to pay attention to the road
and to traffic at all times. If you can safely do so, it is best to pull
off to the side of the road before using your car phone.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
ix
– CONTINUED –
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION
Your vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its
performance, safety or durability, and may even violate govern-
mental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems
resulting from modification may not be covered under warranties.
DRIVING WITH PETS
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your driving and distract your atten-
tion from driving. In a collision or sudden stop, unrestrained pets or
cages can be thrown around inside the vehicle and hurt you or your pas-
sengers. Besides, the pets can be hurt under these situations. It is also
for their own safety that pets should be properly restrained in your
vehicle. Restrain a pet with a special traveling harness which can be se-
cured to the rear seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be
secured to the rear seat by routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s han-
dle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the front passenger’s seat. For
further information, consult your veterinarian, local animal protection so-
ciety or pet shop.
TIRE PRESSURES
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can
cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly become hot. A
sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and
destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of vehicle control
could lead to an accident.
Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month and before any long journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are cold.
Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on
the tire placard.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
x
Refer to the “Tires and wheels” section in chapter 11 for detailed
information.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
Doors and locks
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbag
Instruments and controls
Climate control
1
3
4
Audio
Interior equipment
Starting and operating
In case of emergency
5
6
7
9
Appearance care
Maintenance and service
Specifications
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
Index
14
10
11
12
2
Driving tips
8
xi
– CONTINUED –
Table of contents
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
xii
Illustrated index
J Exterior
HSF015EB
1 Engine hood (page 11-6)
2 Windshield washer
(page 3-22)
3 Wiper switch (page 3-22)
4 Replacement of wiper blade
(page 11-34)
5 Lighting switch (page 3-16)
6 Replacement of light bulbs
(page 11-54)
7 Outside mirror (page 3-31)
8 Locking and unlocking of door
(page 2-3)
9 Tire inflation pressure (page 11-42)
Q Replacement of tire (page 11-47)
W Tire chain (page 8-14)
E Fog light switch (page 3-20)
R Towing hook (page 9-12)
T Rear window wiper and washer
(page 3-24)
Y Roof rail/Roof rack (page 8-18)
U Child safety lock (page 2-19)
I Fuel filler door (Page 7-4)
O Fuel requirement (page 7-2)
P Rear gate (page 2-23)
HSF014BC
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
xiii
– CONTINUED –
J Interior
HSF009BB
1 Head rest (page 1-9)
2 Interior light (page 6-14)
3 Door lock (page 2-3)
4 Moonroof (page 2-24)
5 Center console (page 6-3)
6 Storage compartment (page 6-2)
7 Selector lever/Gearshift lever (page 7-15/7-11)
8 Front seat (page 1-2)
9 Parking brake lever (page 7-26)
Q Seatbelt (combination lap/shoulder belt) (page 1-10)
W Rear seat (page 1-8)
E Rear center passenger’s seat seatbelt (page 1-18)
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
xiv
J Luggage compartment
HSF011BB
HSF010BB
1 Jack handle (page 9-16)
2 Jack (page 9-16)
3 Spare tire (page 9-16)
4 Luggage cover (page 6-16)
5 Cargo anchorage eyelets (page 6-18)
6 Accessory power socket (page 6-8)
7 Luggage floor storage tray (page 6-19)
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
xv
– CONTINUED –
J Instrument panel
HGF000CB
1 Combination meter (page 3-6)
2 Hazard warning flasher switch
(page 3-5)
3 Rear window defogger switch
(page 3-26)/Outside mirror
defogger switch (page 3-33)
4 Cup holder (page 6-6)
5 SRS airbag (page 1-31)
6 Glove compartment
(page 6-3)
7 Heater or air conditioner
control (page 4-4)
8 Audio (page 5-1)
9 Cigarette lighter (page 6-11)
Q Horn (page 3-28)
W Tilt steering (page 3-27)
E Hood lock release
(page 11-6)
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
xvi
HS0006
1 Parking light switch
(page 3-19)
2 Hazard warning flasher switch
(page 3-5)
3 Rear window defogger switch
(page 3-26)/Outside mirror
defogger switch (page 3-33)
4 Rear window wiper and
washer switch (page 3-24)
5 Windshield washer
(page 3-22)
6 Mist (page 3-23)
7 Windshield wiper (page 3-22)
8 Wiper control (page 3-20)
9 Light control (page 3-16)
Q Illumination brightness control
(page 3-18)
W Headlight ON/OFF
(page 3-16)
E Headlight flasher/High/low
beam change
(page 3-17/3-17)
R Turn signal (for lane change)
(page 3-18)
T Turn signal (page 3-18)
1
23
6
5
4
7
89
E
R
T
Q
W
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
xvii
– CONTINUED –
J Combination meter
HSF013BB
1 ABS warning light (page 3-13)
2 Seatbelt warning light
(page 3-10)
3 Front-wheel drive warning light
(page 3-15)
4 Turn signal indicator light
(page3-15)
5 High beam indicator light
(page 3-15)
6 SRS airbag warning light
(page 3-10)
7 Brake system warning lights
(page 3-14)
8 AT oil temperature warning
light (page 3-13)
9 Oil pressure warning light
(page 3-12)
Q Charge warning light
(page 3-12)
W CHECK ENGINE warning
light/Malfunction indicator
lamp (page 3-11)
E Temperature gauge
(page 3-9)
R Outside temperature indicater
(page 3-7)
T Tachometer (page 3-7)
Y Door opening warning light
(page 3-15)
U Security system indicater light
(page 3-15)
I Trip meter A/B selection and
trip meter reset knob
(page 3-6)
O Odometer and trip meter
(page 3-6)
P Speedometer (page 3-6)
A Low fuel warning light
(page 3-8)
S Fuel gauge (page 3-8)
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
xviii
B Warning and indicator light
Mark Name Page
Seatbelt warning light 3-10
AIRBAG
SRS airbag system warning light 3-10
CHECK ENGINE warning light/
Malfunction indicator lamp
3-11
Charge warning light 3-12
Oil pressure warning light 3-12
AT OIL temperature warning light (if equipped) 3-13
or
ABS warning light 3-13
or
Brake system warning light 3-14
Door open warning light 3-15
Front-wheel drive warning light (for AT vehicles) 3-15
Security system indicator light (if equipped) 3-15
Turn signal indicator lights 3-15
High beam indicator light 3-15
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Front seats 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat heater (if equipped) 1-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatbelts 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatbelt safety tips 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) 1-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatbelt warning light and chime 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fastening the seatbelt 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatbelt maintenance 1-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatbelt extender 1-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child restraint systems 1-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top tether anchorages 1-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-31. . . . . . . .
Vehicle with driver’s and front passenger’s SRS airbags and
lap/shoulder restraints 1-31
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS frontal airbag 1-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS side airbag (if equipped) 1-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbag system monitors 1-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbag system servicing 1-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions against vehicle modification 1-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-2
Front seats
WARNING
D Never adjust the seat while driving to avoid the possibility of
loss of vehicle control and of personal injury.
D Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed be-
cause they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury
in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear.
D Before adjusting the seat, make sure the hands and feet of rear
seat passengers are clear of the adjusting mechanism.
D Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding un-
der the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be al-
ways used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If
the front seatbacks are not used in the upright position in a colli-
sion, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt slid-
ing up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in se-
rious internal injury or death.
D Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.
D The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious injuries.
Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the
driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far
from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full ve-
hicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far
back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.
D Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly re-
strained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if
they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or im-
properly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-3
– CONTINUED –
adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater.
For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (includ-
ing those in child seats and those that have outgrown child re-
straint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is ap-
propriate for the child’s age, height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward fac-
ing child seat) in the REAR seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating
positions. For instructions and precautions concerning child re-
straint systems, see the “Child restraint systems” section in this
chapter.
HS0234HS0233
Adjust the seatback to
upright position. Sit well
back and upright.
Move the seat as far from the
steering wheel as practical.
Adjust the seatback to
upright position. Sit
well back and upright.
Move the seat
as far back as
possible.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-4
HS0247 HS0227
Put children in the rear seat properly
restrained at all times.
Do not recline the seatback while
vehicle is moving.
B Fore and aft adjustment
HS0028
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to the desired position. Then
release the lever and move the seat back and forth to make sure that
it is securely locked into place.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-5
– CONTINUED –
B Reclining the seatback
HS0029
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the seatback to the desired posi-
tion. Then release the lever and make sure the seatback is securely
locked into place.
The seatback placed in a reclined position can spring back upward
with force when released. When operating the reclining lever to return
the seatback, hold it lightly so that it may be raised back gradually.
B Seat cushion angle and height adjustment (driver’s seat)
HS0030
For front edge
For rear edge
Lower
Raise
Raise
Lower
Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion to
the desired position.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-6
B Head restraint adjustment
HS0031
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, push the head re-
straint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seat-
back.
The head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-7
– CONTINUED –
Seat heater (if equipped)
CAUTION
D Use of the seat heater for long period of time while the engine
is not running can cause battery discharge.
D Do not put anything on the seat which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
D When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine, paint thinner, or
any similar materials.
The seat heater operates when the ignition switch is either in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
HS0034HS0285
Indicator
HI LO
Heating
element
To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO” or “HI” position on the switch,
as desired, depending on the temperature.
LO: Normal heating
HI: Rapid heating
The indicator located on the switch comes on when the seat heater is in
operation. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed enough or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-8
Rear seats
WARNING
D Never drive the vehicle with the head rest removed because
they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck from the rear.
D Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat. Do not put cushions or any
other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cush-
ions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or death.
D Never allow passengers to ride on the folded rear seatback or
in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury or death.
D Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers
in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
D Secure skis and other lengthy items properly to prevent them
from shooting forward and causing serious injury during a sud-
den stop a sudden steering or a rapid acceleration.
HS0248
Sit well back and
upright.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-9
– CONTINUED –
B Folding down the seatback
WARNING
Never permit anyone to ride in the cargo area.
HB1023BA
HB1022BA
Unlock the seatback by pulling the release knob and then fold the
seatback down.
To return the seatback to its original position, raise the seatback until
it locks into place and make sure that it is securely locked.
B Head rest adjustment
HS1013BA
To raise the head rest, pull it up. To lower it, push the head rest down
while depressing the release button on the top of the seatback.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-10
Seatbelts
J Seatbelt safety tips
WARNING
D All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BE-
FORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of se-
rious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or ac-
cident.
D All belts should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint.
Loose fitting belts are not as effective in preventing or reducing
injury.
D Each seatbelt is designed to support only one person. Never
use a single belt for two or more persons — even children. Other-
wise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.
D Replace all seatbelt assemblies including retractors and at-
taching hardware worn by occupants of a vehicle that has been in
a serious accident. The entire assembly should be replaced even
if damage is not obvious.
D Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly re-
strained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if
they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or im-
properly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than
adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For
that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint
devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a
child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for
the child’s height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward
facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-11
– CONTINUED –
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating
positions. For instructions and precautions concerning the child
restraint system, see the “Child restraint systems” section in this
chapter.
B Infants or small children
Use a child restraint system that is suitable for your vehicle. See in-
formation on “Child restraint systems” in this chapter.
B Children
If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in
the rear seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. According to ac-
cident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a
child to stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses the face or neck, move the
child closer to the belt buckle to help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
Care must be taken to securely place the lap belt as low as possible
on the hips and not on the child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the
belt cannot be properly positioned, a child restraint system should be
used. Never place the shoulder belt under the child’s arm or behind
the child’s back.
B Expectant mothers
Expectant mothers also need to use the seatbelts. They should con-
sult their doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be
worn securely and as low as possible over the hips, not over the
waist.
J Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows normal body movement but the
retractor locks automatically during a sudden stop, impact or if you pull
the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-12
J Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR)
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Automatic/Emergency Locking Re-
tractor (A/ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor normally
functions as an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/ELR has an
additional locking mode “Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode” in-
tended to secure a child restraint system. When the seatbelt is once
drawn out completely and is then retracted even slightly, the retractor
locks the seatbelt in that position and the seatbelt cannot be extended.
As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as ALR. When the seatbelt is retracted fully, ALR mode is re-
leased.
When securing a child restraint system on the passengers’ seats, the
seatbelt must be changed over to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode.
When the child restraint system is removed, make sure that the retractor
operates as an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR).
For instructions on how to convert the retractor to the ALR mode and re-
store it to the ELR mode, see the “Child restraint systems” section in this
chapter.
J Seatbelt warning light and chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning device at the driver’s
seat, as required by current safety standards.
This device causes the seatbelt warning light on the instrument panel to
light up for about six seconds when the ignition switch is turned to “ON”
to remind the driver to wear the seatbelt. If the driver’s seatbelt is not fas-
tened, a warning chime sounds at the same time.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-13
– CONTINUED –
J Fastening the seatbelt
WARNING
D Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this
can increase the risk or severity of injury.
D Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the
back. If an accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity
of injury.
D Keep the lap belt as low as possible on your hips. In a colli-
sion, this spreads the force of the lap belt over stronger hip
bones instead of across the weaker abdomen.
D Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding un-
der the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be al-
ways used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If
the front seatbacks are not used in the upright position in a colli-
sion, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt slid-
ing up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in se-
rious internal injury or death.
D Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or
death.
HS0231
Never place the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back.
HS0230
Always wear the
seatbelts correctly.
Adjust the seatback
to upright position.
Sit well back and
upright.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-14
CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can become very hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an oc-
cupant. Do not touch such hot parts until they cool.
B Front seatbelts
OM-H0044OM-H0043
1. Adjust the seat position:
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the
seatback as far from the steering wheel as practical while still main-
taining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position.
Move the seat as far back as possible.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it
get twisted. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the
belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then
pull it out slowly again.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. And place
the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-15
– CONTINUED –
n Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt anchor height
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make sure the shoulder portion of
the webbing does not pass over your neck. If it does, adjust the
seatbelt anchor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder belt
over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or
in a collision.
HB1029BB
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position
best suited for you. To lower the anchor height, push the release but-
ton and slide the anchor down. To raise the anchor height, slide the
anchor up. Pull down on the anchor to make sure that it is locked in
place.
Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder belt passes over
the middle of the shoulder without touching the neck.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-16
n Unfastening the seatbelt
HB0303
Push
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted prop-
erly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.
B Rear seatbelts (except rear center seatbelt)
OM-H0044OM-H0043
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it
get twisted. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the
belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving a strong pull on it,
then pull it out slowly again.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-17
– CONTINUED –
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. And place
the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.
n Adjusting the rear seat shoulder belt anchor height
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make sure the shoulder portion of
the webbing does not pass over your neck. If it does, adjust the
seatbelt anchor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder belt
over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or
in a collision.
HS1020BB
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position
best suited for you. To adjust the shoulder belt anchor height, push
the release button and slide the anchor down or up. Pull down on the
anchor to make sure that it is locked in place.
Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder belt passes over
the middle of the shoulder without touching the neck.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-18
n Unfastening the seatbelt
HB0303
Push
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted prop-
erly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.
B Rear center seatbelt
WARNING
D Before fastening the seatbelt, confirm that the seatbelt is
routed through the seatbelt comfort guide. A seatbelt not routed
through the guide can cause neck injuries during sudden braking
or in a collision since it may slip up on your neck.
D Fastening the seatbelt with the webbing twisted can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an accident. When fastening the
belt after it is pulled out from the retractor, especially when
inserting the connector’s tongue plate into the mating buckle (on
right-hand side), always check that the webbing is not twisted.
D Be sure to fasten both tongue plates to the respective buckles.
If the seatbelt is used only as a shoulder belt (with the connec-
tor’s tongue plate not fastened to the connector’s buckle on the
right-hand side), it cannot properly restrain the wearer in position
in an accident, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-19
– CONTINUED –
HB1031BAHB1030BA
HS1017BB
HS1025BB
HB1032BA
1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the overhead retractor, then pass
the seatbelt through the seatbelt comfort guide located beside the
1. Center seatbelt tongue
plate
2. Connector (tongue)
3. Connector (buckle)
4. Center seatbelt buckle
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-20
head rest.
HB1033CA
2. After confirming that the webbing is not twisted, insert the connec-
tor (tongue) attached at the webbing end into the buckle on the right-
hand side until a click is heard. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt
still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
HB1034BA
3. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate in the center seatbelt buckle
marked “CENTER” on the left-hand side until it clicks. To make the lap
part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. And place the lap belt as low
as possible on your hips, not on your waist.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-21
– CONTINUED –
HS1019BA
n Unfastening the seatbelt
HS0317
Push
Push the release button of the center seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand
side) to unfasten the seatbelt.
NOTE
When the seatback is folded down for greater luggage space, it is
necessary to disconnect the connector.
CAUTION
D Do not allow the retractor to roll up the seatbelt too quickly.
Otherwise, the metal tongue plates may hit against the trim,
resulting in damaged trim.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-22
D Have the seatbelt fully rolled up so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored. A hanging tongue plate can swing and hit against
the trim during driving, causing damage to the trim.
HS1022BA
HS1021BA
1. Insert a key or other hard pointed object into the slot in the con-
nector (buckle) on the right-hand side and push it in, and the connec-
tor (tongue) plate will disconnect from the buckle.
HS1024BA
HS1023BA
2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt. You should hold the webbing
end and guide it back into the retractor while it is rolling up. Neatly
store the tongue plates in the recess in the retractor and then insert
the connector (tongue) plate into the slot located at the front of the
recess.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-23
– CONTINUED –
J Seatbelt maintenance
CAUTION
D Keep the belts free of polishes, oils, chemicals and particularly
battery acid.
D Never attempt to make modifications or changes that will pre-
vent the seatbelt from operating properly.
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and lukewarm water. Never
bleach or dye the belts because this could seriously affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments including the webbing and all
hardware periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears, damage, loose
bolts or worn areas. Replace the seatbelts even if only minor damage is
found.
Seatbelt extender
If the front seatbelts are not long enough to permit the tongue plate to
engage with the seatbelt buckle, an optional seatbelt extender is avail-
able from your SUBARU dealer. When ordering an extender, only order
one particularly designed for your vehicle. Several different types of
extenders are available to match various varieties of front seatbelt
designs. See your SUBARU dealer for assistance.
The extender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length and it can
be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position.
WARNING
Be sure to observe the following when using the seatbelt extend-
er.
Failure to follow these instructions and warnings could reduce
the effectiveness of the seatbelt and result in more serious injury
in the event of a collision.
D Never use the extender when the belt itself is long enough to
permit it to be buckled properly. If removal of heavy clothing is all
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-24
that is needed to permit the seatbelt to be buckled properly, re-
move the heavy clothing and do not use the extender.
D Do not use the extender if the buckle of the extender rests
over the abdomen.
D Do not let someone else use the extender. Use of an extender
when it is not needed could reduce the effectiveness of the seat-
belt and result in more serious injury in the event of a collision.
D Use the extender only for the front seatbelts and only for the
model for which it was originally provided. Never use the extend-
er for the rear seatbelts or for a different model.
NOTE
When the seatbelt extender is used by a pregnant passenger, con-
sult a doctor to get approval in advance.
HZS000BA
To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tongue plate into the
seatbelt buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on the buckle-release buttons
of the extender and the seatbelt are both facing outward as shown in the
diagram. You will hear a click when the tongue plate locks into the
buckle.
When releasing the seatbelt, press on the buckle-release button on the
extender, not on the seatbelt. This helps to prevent damage to the ve-
hicle interior and extender itself.
For the safety of others, the extender should be removed after each use,
especially if the next person using the seatbelt does not need one.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-25
– CONTINUED –
Child restraint systems
WARNING
D Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the
passenger and objects inside the vehicle. Additionally, holding a
child in your lap or arms in the front seat exposes that child to
another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with con-
siderable speed and force, the child could be injured or even
killed.
D Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly re-
strained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if
they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or im-
properly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than
adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater.
For that reason, be sure to secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats
at all times. You should choose a restraint device which is
appropriate for the child’s age, height and weight.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating
positions.
D SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S
SRS AIRBAG, DO NOT INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD
SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SE-
RIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
D Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat at all
times. Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front
passenger’s seat. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable
force and can injure or even kill the child.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-26
HS1031BBHS0229
HS0228HS0042
Never allow a child to stand up, or to
kneel on the front passenger’s seat
or any other seat.
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms in the front passenger’s
seat or any other seat.
Never install rearward facing child
seat in the front passenger’s seat.
WARNING
D Child restraint systems and seatbelts can become hot in a ve-
hicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn
a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a
child in it.
D Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehi-
cle. Unsecured child restraint systems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; it can strike
and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries
or death to the child.
Infants and small children should always be placed in an infant or child
restraint system in the rear seat while riding in the vehicle. You should use
an infant or child restraint system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-27
– CONTINUED –
Standards or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is compatible with
your vehicle and is appropriate for the child’s age and size. All child re-
straint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
Children could be endangered in an accident if their child restraints are
not properly secured in the vehicle. When installing the child restraint
system, carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly re-
strained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.
These statistics also indicate that the safest position for a child restraint
system is the center of the rear seat.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child restraint system at all times
while the vehicle is moving.
B Installing child restraint systems
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and
restore the ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored
by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-28
HB1080BA
Make sure that the seatbelt is securely locked into place.
1. Set the child restraint system in the seating position.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belts through or around the child re-
straint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it be-
hind the child restraint system.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to change the retractor
over from the Emergency Locking Retractor(ELR) to the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into
the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indi-
cate the retractor functions as ALR.
6. Before having a child sit in the child restraint system, move it back
and forth to check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint
can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion
and then tightening the seatbelt.
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be
pulled out (ALR properly functioning).
If the child restraint system requires a top tether, first remove the head
rest and then latch the hook onto the top tether anchor and tighten the
top tether. See the “Top tether anchorages” for additional instructions.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-29
– CONTINUED –
HS0045
8. To remove the child restraint system, press the release button on
the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt
will return to the ELR mode.
If you have any question concerning this type of child restraint sys-
tem, ask your SUBARU dealer.
J Top tether anchorages
B Anchorage location
HS1030BB
Three anchorages, i.e., ones for the right, center and left positions,
are already installed on the rear edge of the roof.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-30
B To hook the top tether
CAUTION
Always remove the head rest when mounting a child restraint
system with a top tether.
Otherwise, it may happen that the top tether cannot be fastened
tightly.
HS1029BAHSS001BA
1. Remove the head rest at the seat position where the child restraint
has been installed with the seatbelt: lift up the head rest while press-
ing the release button. Store the head rest in the cargo area. Avoid
placing the head rest in the passenger compartment to prevent it from
being thrown around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop
or a sharp turn.
2. Fasten the top tether hook of the child restraint to the appropriate
anchorage.
3. Tighten the top tether securely.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-31
– CONTINUED –
*SRS airbag
(Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
*SRS: This stands for supplemental restraint system. This name is used
because the airbag system supplements the vehicle’s seatbelts.
J Vehicle with driver’s and front passenger’s SRS air-
bags and lap/shoulder restraints
WARNING
D To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the vehicle should always wear seat-
belts when the vehicle is moving. The SRS airbag is designed
only as a supplement to the primary protection provided by the
seatbelt. It does not do away with the need to fasten seatbelts. In
combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined
protection in case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the car has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt system,
see the “Seatbelts” sections in this chapter.
D Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag. Be-
cause the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed – faster
than the blink of an eye – and force to protect in high speed colli-
sions, the force of an airbag can injure an occupant whose body
is too close to SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries
that can result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant not in
proper position such as one thrown forward during pre-accident
braking.
Even when properly positioned, there remains a possibility that an
occupant may suffer minor injury such as abrasions and bruises
to the face or arms because of the SRS airbag deployment force.
D The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-32
deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS air-
bag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should al-
ways sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and
the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible
and sit upright and well back in the seat.
D Do not place any objects over or near the SRS airbag cover or
between you and the SRS airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys,
those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could
be propelled inside the car and cause injury.
D Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly re-
strained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if
they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or im-
properly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than
adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater.
For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (in-
cluding those in child seats and those that have outgrown child
restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is ap-
propriate for the child’s age, height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward
facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating
positions.
For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint
system, see the “Child restraint systems” section in this chapter.
D NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
D Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front pas-
senger’s seat, or never hold a child on your lap or in your arms.
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-33
– CONTINUED –
HB0291
Put children in the REAR seat prop-
erly restrained at all times.
CAUTION
D When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing trouble. If you or your pas-
sengers have breathing problems after SRS airbag deploys, get
fresh air promptly.
D A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Occupants could get
burnt if they come into direct contact with the hot gas.
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) consists of two airbags (driver’s
and front passenger’s frontal airbags) or four airbags (driver’s and front
passenger’s frontal airbags and driver’s and front passenger’s side air-
bags).
These SRS airbags are designed only as a supplement to the prima-
ry protection provided by the seatbelt.
NOTE
When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that
it is equipped with SRS airbags by alerting him to the applicable
section in this owner’s manual.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-34
B Components
1 Airbag control module
(including impact sensors)
2 Airbag module (driver’s side)
3 Airbag module
(passenger’s side)
4 Front sub sensor
(left hand side)
5 Front sub sensor
(right hand side)
6 Side airbag module
(driver’s side — if equipped)
7 Side airbag module
(passenger’s side — if
equipped)
8 Side airbag sensor
(driver’s side)
9 Side airbag sensor
(passenger’s side)
Q Airbag wiring (yellow)
HS1027DB
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-35
– CONTINUED –
J SRS frontal airbag
WARNING
D NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
D Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front pas-
senger’s seat, or never hold a child on your lap or in your arms.
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
D The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS air-
bag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should al-
ways sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and
the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible
and sit upright and well back in the seat.
It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries
that can result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant not in
proper position such as one thrown toward the front of the car
during pre-accident braking.
HS0042
HS0228
Never allow a child to stand up, or to
kneel on the front passenger’s seat
or any other seat.
Never install rearward facing child
seat in the front passenger’s seat.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-36
HS0229
HS0233
Adjust the seatback to
upright position. Sit well
back and upright.
Move the seat as far from the
steering wheel as practical.
HS0234
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms in the front passenger’s
seat or any other seat.
Adjust the seatback to
upright position. Sit
well back and upright.
Move the seat
as far back as
possible.
WARNING
D Do not put any objects over the steering wheel pad and dash-
board. If the SRS frontal airbag deploys, those objects could in-
terfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the
vehicle and cause injury.
D Do not attach accessories to the windshield, or fit an extra-
wide mirror over the rear view mirror. If the SRS airbag deploys,
those objects could become projectiles that could seriously in-
jure vehicle occupants.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-37
– CONTINUED –
HS0245HS0244
Do not put any objects over the
steering wheel pad and dashboard
Do not attach accessories to the
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-
ror over the rear view mirror.
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed in the center portion of the
steering wheel. The passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed near the
top of the dashboard under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy and supplement the seatbelts by reduc-
ing the impact on the driver’s and front passenger’s head and chest.
B Operation
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS airbag system components around the
steering wheel and dashboard with bare hands right after deploy-
ment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be
very hot as a result of deployment.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-38
HS2001BB
The SRS airbag can function only when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
If the front sub sensors inside the both front fenders and the impact
sensors in the airbag control module detect a certain predetermined
amount of force during a frontal collision, the control module sends
signals to the frontal airbag modules instructing them to inflate the
SRS frontal airbags. Then both airbag modules produce gas, which
instantly inflates driver’s and passenger’s SRS frontal airbags. After
the deployment, the SRS airbags immediately start to deflate so that
the driver’s vision is not obstructed. The time required from detecting
impact to the deflating SRS airbag after deployment is shorter than
the blink of an eye.
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag deploys together with driv-
er’s SRS frontal airbag even when no one occupies the front passen-
ger’s seat.
Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS airbag would activate in a
non-accident situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag will deflate
quickly, not obscuring vision and will not interfere with the driver’s
ability to maintain control of the vehicle.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-39
– CONTINUED –
be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are
normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in
the vehicle.
The SRS frontal airbag is designed to deploy in the event of an acci-
dent involving a moderate to severe frontal collision. It is basically not
designed to deploy in lesser frontal impacts because the necessary
protection can be achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, it is basically
not designed to deploy in side or rear impacts or in roll-over acci-
dents because deployment of the SRS frontal airbag would not help
the occupant in those situations. The SRS airbag is designed to func-
tion on a one-time-only basis.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in
the passenger compartment during a collision. That level differs from
one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the
visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
n Examples of accident in which the SRS frontal airbag will most
likely deploy.
A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a vehicle speed of
12 to 19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) activates the SRS frontal airbag. The
SRS frontal airbag will also be activated when the vehicle is exposed
to a frontal impact similar in fashion and magnitude to the above-men-
tioned collision.
HS1016BA
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-40
n Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that
the SRS frontal airbag will deploy.
The SRS frontal airbag may be activated when the vehicle sustains a
hard impact in the undercarriage area from the road surface (such as
when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch, is severely bumped or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the road such as a curb).
HS1015BAHS1014BA
n Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS frontal
airbag is unlikely to deploy.
There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require
SRS frontal airbag deployment. If the vehicle strikes an object, such
as a telephone pole or sign pole, or if it slides under a truck’s load
bed, or if it sustains an oblique offset frontal impact, the SRS frontal
airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces in-
volved.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-41
– CONTINUED –
HS0240HS0239HS0238
The vehicle strikes a tele-
phone pole or similar ob-
ject.
The vehicle slides under
a truck’s load bed.
The vehicle sustains an
oblique offset frontal im-
pact.
n Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS frontal
airbag will basically not deploy.
The SRS frontal airbag is basically not designed to deploy if the
vehicle is struck from side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its side or
roof, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision.
HS0243HS0242HS0241
The vehicle is struck from
behind.
The vehicle is struck from
the side.
The vehicle rolls onto its
side or roof.
In an accident where the vehicle is impacted more than once, the
SRS frontal airbag deploys only once.
Example: In the case of a double collision, first with another vehicle,
then against a concrete wall in immediate succession, the SRS frontal
airbag is activated on the first impact but not on the second.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-42
HB1070BB
J SRS side airbag (if equipped)
WARNING
D The SRS side airbag is designed as only a supplement to the
primary protection provided by the seatbelt. It does not do away
with the need to fasten seatbelts. It is also important to wear your
seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when an occupant is
not seated in a proper upright position.
D Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to either front door. The
SRS side airbag is stored in both front seat seatbacks next to the
door, and it provides protection by deploying rapidly (faster than
the blink of an eye) in the event of a side impact collision. Howev-
er, the force of SRS side airbag deployment may cause injuries if
your head or other body parts are too close to the SRS side air-
bag.
D Do not rest your arm on either front door or its internal trim. It
could be injured in the event of SRS side airbag deployment.
D Never allow a child to kneel on the front passenger’s seat fac-
ing the side window or to wrap his/her arms around the front seat
seatback. In the event of an accident, the force of SRS side airbag
deployment could seriously injure or even kill the child because
his/her head or arms or other body parts are close to the side air-
bag. Since your vehicle is also equipped with a passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag, children aged 12 and under should be placed in
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-43
– CONTINUED –
the rear seat anyway and should be properly restrained at all
times.
HS0351HS0349
HB0354
Never allow a child to kneel on the
front passenger’s seat facing the side
window.
HB0355
Never allow a child to wrap his/her
arms around the front seatback.
Do not sit or learn unnecessary
close to the front door.
Do not rest your arm on either front
door or its internal trim.
WARNING
D Do not attach accessories to the door trim or near either SRS
side airbags and do not place objects near the SRS side airbags.
In the event of the SRS side airbag deployment, they could be
propelled dangerously toward the vehicle’s occupants and cause
injuries.
D Do not put any kind of cover or clothes or other objects over
either front seatback and do not attach labels or stickers to the
front seat surface on or near the SRS side airbag. They could pre-
vent proper deployment of the SRS side airbag, reducing protec-
tion available to the front seat’s occupant.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-44
HS0353
Do not attach accessories to the door
trim or near either side airbag and do
not place objects near either side air-
bag.
HS0347
Do not put any kind of cover over
either seatback.
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door side of each front seatback,
which bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the
door panel and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the
occupant’s chest.
B Operation
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS side airbag system components around the
front seatback with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so
can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a
result of deployment.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-45
– CONTINUED –
SRS side airbag deploys as
soon as a collision occurs.
After deployment, SRS side
airbag starts to deflate immedi-
ately.
HB0359
The SRS side airbag can function only when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position.
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS side airbags deploy indepen-
dently of each other since each has its own impact sensor. Also, the
SRS side airbag deploys independently of the frontal airbags in the
steering wheel and instrument panel.
An impact sensor is incorporated into each of the vehicle’s center pil-
lars. If either sensor detects a certain predetermined amount of force
during a side impact collision, the control module sends a signal to
the side airbag module on the impacted side of the vehicle, instruct-
ing it to inflate the SRS side airbag. Then the side airbag module pro-
duces gas, which instantly inflates the SRS side airbag. After the de-
ployment, the SRS side airbag immediately starts to deflate. The time
required from detecting impact to deflating of the SRS side airbag af-
ter deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye.
The SRS side airbag deploys even when no one occupies the seat on
the side on which an impact is applied.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-46
When the SRS side airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation
noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occur-
rences are normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indi-
cate a fire in the vehicle.
The SRS side airbag is designed to deploy in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe side impact collision. It is basically not
designed to deploy in lesser side impacts. Also, it is basically not de-
signed to deploy in frontal or rear impacts because SRS side airbag
deployment would not help the occupant in those situations.
Each SRS side airbag is designed to function on a one-time-only ba-
sis.
SRS side airbag deployment depends on the level of force experi-
enced in the passenger compartment during a side impact collision.
That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have
no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
n Example of the type of accident in which the SRS side airbag
will most likely deploy.
A severe side impact near the front seat activates the SRS side air-
bag.
HB0313
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-47
– CONTINUED –
n Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side air-
bag is unlikely to deploy.
There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require
SRS side airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illus-
trated below, the SRS side airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
HS0343HS0342HS0344
The vehicle strikes a
telephone pole or similar
object.
The vehicle is involved in a
side-on impact in an area
outside the passenger
compartment.
The vehicle is involved in
an oblique side-on impact.
HS0243HS0345
The vehicle is involved in
a side-on impact from a
motorcycle.
The vehicle rolls onto its
side or roof.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-48
n Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side air-
bag will basically not deploy.
The SRS side airbag is basically not designed to deploy if the vehicle
is involved in a frontal collision or is struck from behind. Examples of
such accidents are illustrated below.
HS0241HS0355
The vehicle is involved in a frontal
collision with another vehicle (moving
or stationary).
The vehicle is struck from behind.
In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side more than
once, the SRS side airbag deploys only once.
Example: In the case of a double side impact collision, first with one
vehicle and immediately followed by another from the same direction,
the SRS side airbag is activated on the first impact but not on the se-
cond.
HB1071BB
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-49
– CONTINUED –
J SRS airbag system monitors
HS7004FA
A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the SRS air-
bag system while the vehicle is being driven. The SRS airbag system
warning light “AIRBAG” will show normal system operation by lighting for
about 6 seconds when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
The following components are monitored by the indicator:
D Front sub sensor (Right hand side)
D Front sub sensor (Left hand side)
D Airbag control module (including impact sensors)
D Frontal airbag module (Driver’s side)
D Frontal airbag module (Passenger’s side)
D Side airbag sensor (Driver’s side — if equipped)
D Side airbag sensor (Passenger’s side — if equipped)
D Side airbag module (Driver’s side — if equipped)
D Side airbag module (Passenger’s side — if equipped)
D All related wiring
In the event of a malfunction indicated by any of following, the vehicle
should be taken promptly to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the
system checked. Unless checked and repaired, the SRS airbags will not
function reliably:
D Flashing or flickering of the indicator light.
D No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first
turned to the “ON” position.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-50
D Continuous illumination of the warning light.
D Illumination of the warning light while driving.
J SRS airbag system servicing
WARNING
D When discarding an airbag module or scrapping the entire car
damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.
D The SRS airbag has no user-serviceable parts. Do not use
electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS airbag
system. For required servicing of the SRS airbag, see your near-
est SUBARU dealer. Tampering with or disconnecting the sys-
tem’s wiring could result in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag
or could make the system inoperative, which may result in seri-
ous injury. The wiring harnesses of the SRS airbag system are
covered with yellow insulation and system connectors are yellow
for easy identification.
CAUTION
If you need service or repair in areas listed below, we recommend
that you have an authorized SUBARU dealer perform the work. The
SRS airbag control module, impact sensors and airbag modules
are stored in these areas.
D Under the center console
D Inside each front fender
D Steering wheel and column and nearby areas
D Top of the dashboard on front passenger’s side and nearby
areas
D Each front seat and nearby area (for vehicle with SRS side
airbags only)
D Inside each center pillar (for vehicle with SRS side airbags
only)
In the event that the SRS airbag is deployed, replacement of the sys-
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-51
– CONTINUED –
tem should be performed only by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
When the components of the SRS airbag system are replaced, use
only genuine SUBARU parts.
To ensure their long-term reliability, the SRS airbags must be inspected
by a SUBARU dealer ten years after the date of manufacture, which is
shown on the certification label attached to the driver’s door.
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
D The front part of the vehicle was involved in an accident in
which the SRS frontal airbags did not deploy.
D The pad section of the steering wheel or front passenger’s
frontal airbag cover is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
In addition, if your vehicle is equipped with SRS side airbags, con-
tact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible in the following
cases.
D Either center pillar or a nearby area of the vehicle was involved
in an accident in which the SRS side airbag did not deploy.
D The fabric or leather of either front seatback is cut, frayed, or
otherwise damaged.
J Precautions against vehicle modification
WARNING
D To avoid accidental activation of the system or rendering the
system inoperative, which may result in serious injury, no modifi-
cations should be made to any components or wiring of the SRS
airbag system.
This includes following modifications:
D Installation of custom steering wheels
D Attachment of additional trim materials to the dashboard
D Installation of custom seats (for vehicles with SRS side air-
bags only)
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
1-52
D Replacement of seat fabric or leather (for vehicles with SRS
side airbags only)
D Installation of additional fabric or leather on the front seat
(for vehicles with SRS side airbags only)
D Installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment such
as a mobile two-way radio on or near the SRS airbag system
components and/or wiring is not advisable. This could interfere
with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifi-
cations can interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag sys-
tem.
D Attachment of any equipment (brush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than SUBARU genuine accessory parts to
the front end.
D Modification of the suspension system or front end structure.
D Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the
original tires listed on the tire placard attached to the door jamb.
D Attachment of any equipment (side steps or side sill protec-
tors, etc.) to the side body (for vehicles with side airbags only).
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to install any accessory
parts to your vehicle.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2
Doors and locks
Keys 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master, submaster and valet key 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key number 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door locks 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power door locking switches 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless entry system (if equipped) 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security system (if equipped) 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety locks 2-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows 2-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear gate 2-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moonroof (if equipped) 2-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2-2
Keys
HS0009
Master key
Submaster key
Valet key
Key number plate
J Master, submaster and valet key
Three types of keys are provided for your vehicle.
Master key, submaster key and valet key.
The master key and submaster key fit all locks on your vehicle.
D Ignition switch
D Doors
D Rear gate
D Glove compartment
The valet key fits only the ignition switch and door locks. You can keep
the glove compartment locked when you leave your vehicle and valet
key at a parking facility.
J Key number
The key number is stamped on the metal plate attached to the key set.
Write down the key number and keep it in another safe place, not in the
vehicle. This number is needed to make a replacement key if you lose
your key or lock it inside the vehicle.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2
Doors and locks
2-3
– CONTINUED –
Door locks
B Locking and unlocking from the outside
HS0010
Unlock
Lock
To lock the door from the outside with the key, turn the key toward the
rear. To unlock the door, turn the key toward the front.
Pull the outside door handle to open an unlocked door.
Locking without the key
HS0011
1
2
1 Press the lock lever.
2 Close the door.
HB2024CB
To lock the door from the outside without the key, press the end of the
lock lever down on the door and then close the door.
To lock the door from the outside using the power door locking switch,
push the switch forward (“LOCK” side) and then close the door. In this
case, all closed doors and the rear gate are locked at the same time.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2-4
Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate are locked before
leaving your vehicle.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before
locking the doors from the outside without the key.
B Locking and unlocking from the inside
WARNING
Keep all doors locked when you drive, especially when small chil-
dren are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of seat belts and child restraints, lock-
ing the doors reduces the chance of being thrown out of the ve-
hicle in an accident.
It also helps prevent passengers from falling out if a door is acci-
dentally opened, and intruders from unexpectedly opening doors
and entering your vehicle.
HS0014
Unlock
Lock
Red mark
Inside door handle
To lock the door from the inside, press the end of the lock lever down.
To unlock the door from the inside, pull the front end of the lock lever.
The red mark on the lock lever appears when the door is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an unlocked door.
Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate are closed and
locked before starting to drive.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2
Doors and locks
2-5
– CONTINUED –
J Power door locking switches
HB2009BBHB2008CB
All doors and the rear gate can be locked and unlocked by the power
door locking switches located at the driver’s side and the front passen-
ger’s side doors.
To lock the doors, push the switch forward.
To unlock the doors, push the switch rearward.
When you close the doors after you set the door locks, the doors remain
locked.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before
locking the doors from the outside using power door locking
switches.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2-6
Keyless entry system (if equipped)
CAUTION
D Do not expose the transmitter to severe shocks, such as those
experienced as a result of dropping or throwing.
D Do not take the transmitter apart except when replacing the
battery.
D Do not get the transmitter wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with a
cloth immediately.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Two transmitters are provided for your vehicle.
The keyless entry system has the following functions.
D Locking and unlocking the doors and rear gate without a key
D Sounding a panic alarm
D Arming and disarming the security system (if your vehicle is equipped
with an optional security system). See the next section “Security system
(if equipped)” for detailed information.
The operable distance of the keyless entry system is approximately 30
feet (10 meters). However, this distance will vary depending on environ-
mental conditions. Range may be reduced near sources of RF interfer-
ence such as power plants and radio/television broadcasting towers.
The keyless entry system does not operate when the key is inserted in
the ignition switch.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2
Doors and locks
2-7
– CONTINUED –
HB1000BB
1. Press once to Unlock
driver’s door.
2. Press a second time
to Unlockall doors.
Press to Lock all doors.
Press and Hold to
activate panic alarm.
LED
B Locking the doors
Briefly press the “LOCK/ARM” button (for less than two seconds) to
lock all doors and rear gate. The horn will sound one time.
If any of the doors or the rear gate is not fully closed, the horn will
sound three times to alert you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not
properly closed. When you close the door, it will automatically lock.
B Unlocking the doors
Briefly press the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button (for less than two
seconds) to unlock the driver’s door. The horn will sound two times. To
unlock all doors and rear gate, briefly press the “UNLOCK/DISARM”
button a second time within 5 seconds.
B Illuminated entry
The interior (dome) light will illuminate when the “UNLOCK/DISARM”
button is pressed. The light will illuminate for approximately 30
seconds or until the “LOCK/ARM” button is pressed. Once any of the
doors or the rear gate is opened, this function will be canceled. The
interior light must be set to the middle position in order for this func-
tion to operate.
B Sounding a panic alarm
To activate the alarm, keep the “LOCK/ARM” button pressed for more
than two seconds.
To deactivate it, press the “LOCK/ARM” button or “UNLOCK/DISARM”
button. Unless a button on the remote is pressed, the alarm will be
deactivated after approximately 30 seconds.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2-8
B Selecting audible signal operation
Using the horn, the system will give you an audible signal when the
doors lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn the audible signal off.
To turn the audible signal off, unlock the doors by pushing “UNLOCK/DIS-
ARM” button and then simultaneously depress “LOCK/ARM” and
“UNLOCK/DISARM” buttons for more than two seconds. The horn will
sound two times to inform you that the audible signal has been turned off.
To turn the audible signal on, unlock the doors by pushing “UNLOCK/
DISARM” button and then simultaneously depress “LOCK/ARM” and
“UNLOCK/DISARM” buttons for more than two seconds. The horn will
sound one time to inform you that the audible signal has been turned
on.
B Replacing the battery
CAUTION
Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the transmitter when
replacing the battery.
When the transmitter battery begins to get weak, transmitter range will
begin to decrease and the LED will not illuminate. Replace the battery
as soon as possible.
HB1002BBHB1001BA
Positive (+)
side facing up
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the two screws on the back of the transmitter case by
using a phillips screwdriver.
2. Separate the case.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2
Doors and locks
2-9
– CONTINUED –
3. Remove the old battery from the holder.
4. Replace with a new battery (Type CR2032 or equivalent) making
sure to install the new battery with the positive (+) side facing up.
5. Install the back half of the transmitter case.
6. Reinstall the two screws on the back of the transmitter case.
After the battery is replaced, the transmitter must be synchro-
nized with the keyless entry system’s control unit. Press either
the “LOCK/ARM” or “UNLOCK/DISARM” button six times to syn-
chronize the unit.
B Replacing lost transmitters
If you lose a transmitter or want to purchase additional transmitters
(up to four can be programmed), you should re-program all of your
transmitters for security reasons. It is recommended that you have
your dealer program all of your transmitters into your system.
n Programming the transmitters
The keyless entry system is equipped with a special code learning
feature that allows you to program new transmitter codes into the sys-
tem or to delete old ones. The system can learn up to four unique
transmitter codes. The four transmitter codes may be the same or dif-
ferent.
To enter the programming mode:
HB1005BCHB1000CB
1 Press to dis-
arm the security
system (if so
equipped).
2
3
1. Disarm the security system. (if your vehicle is equipped with the
optional security system.)
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2-10
2. Open the driver’s door and sit in the driver’s seat.
3. Close the driver’s door.
HB2032BB
4. Place the ignition key into the ignition switch and cycle the switch
from LOCK to ON ten times within 15 seconds. Be sure to stop at the
LOCK position. The horn will sound once to indicate that you are in
the transmitter programming mode.
NOTE
You must finish the next step (opening the driver’s door) within
45 seconds of starting this procedures.
To program the transmitters:
HB1000DB
1
2
HB1005BB
3 Press any button.
1. Open the driver’s door.
2. Close the driver’s door.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2
Doors and locks
2-11
– CONTINUED –
3. Press and release any button on the transmitter that you wish to
program into the system. The horn will sound two times to indicate
that the transmitter has been programmed.
Any additional transmitters can also be programmed at this time.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for an additional transmitter.
To exit the programming mode:
1. After all of your transmitters are programmed, remove the key from
the ignition switch.
The horn will sound three times to indicate that the system has exited
the programming mode.
2. Make sure that the keyless entry system properly operates by
operating each transmitter.
n Deleting old transmitter codes
The control unit of the keyless entry system has four memory loca-
tions to store transmitter codes, giving it the ability to operate with up
to four transmitters. When you lose a transmitter, the lost transmitter’s
code remains in the memory. For security reasons, lost transmitter
codes should be deleted from the memory.
To delete old transmitter codes, program four transmitter codes into
the system. If you have only one current transmitter, program it four
times. If you have two current transmitters, program each one twice. If
you have three current transmitters, program two of them once and
the third one twice. This process will leave only current transmitter
codes in the system’s memory.
NOTE
Make sure no one else is operating their keyless entry system
within range of your vehicle when programming transmitters. If
someone else were to operate their remote transmitter while you
are programming your transmitters, it is possible that their trans-
mitter code will be programmed into your system, allowing them
unauthorized access to your vehicle.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2-12
Security system (if equipped)
The security system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from
theft. The horn sounds and the parking lights flash if someone attempts
to break into your vehicle. The starter motor is also interrupted to prevent
starting the vehicle without a key.
The system can be armed and disarmed with the remote transmitter.
The system does not operate when the key is inserted into the ignition
switch.
B System operation
The security system will give the following alarm indications when trig-
gered:
D The parking lights will flash and the horn will sound intermittently.
In addition, the starter motor will not operate.
D The alarm automatically resets after 30 seconds; however, the
alarm will reactivate if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm
will continue for six times if any sensor continues to be activated.
The alarm is triggered by:
D Opening a door or the rear gate.
D Application of physical shock to the vehicle (e.g. breaking glass or
forced entry). Note that there are two alarm levels for shock: warning
and alarm. In warning mode, the alarm detects lower level vibrations
and triggers 2 warning chirps on the horn and two flashes on the
lights as a deterrent to would be vandals. In alarm mode, higher lev-
els of shock are detected and the system will go into full alarm.
D Ignition switch being turned on while in armed state.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2
Doors and locks
2-13
– CONTINUED –
B Arming the system
n To arm the system using remote transmitter
HS3006BB
Press to
Arm the
system.
Press to
Disarm the
system.
HB1000EB
1. Close all windows and moonroofs (if so equipped).
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is locked.
5. Close all doors and the rear gate.
6. Briefly press the “LOCK/ARM” button (for less than two seconds).
All doors (and the rear gate) will lock, the horn will sound one time,
the parking lights will flash one time and the indicator light starts
flashing slowly (approximately once every two seconds).
If any of the doors or the rear gate is not fully closed, the horn sounds
three times, the parking lights flash three times and the indicator light
flashes rapidly to alert you that the doors or the rear gate are not
properly closed. When you close the door, the system will automati-
cally arm and doors will automatically lock.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2-14
n To arm the system using power door locking switches
HB2024CC
1. Close all windows and moonroofs (if so equipped).
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is locked.
5. Close the doors (and the rear gate) but leave only the driver’s door
or the front passenger’s door open.
6. Push the power door locking switch forward (“LOCK” side) to set
the door locks.
7. Close the door. The horn will sound one time, the parking lights will
flash one time and the indicator light will start flashing slowly (approxi-
mately once every two seconds) to inform you that the system has
armed.
NOTE
The system can be armed even if the engine hood, the windows
and/or moonroofs are opened. Always make sure that they are
fully closed before arming the system.
B Disarming the system
Briefly press the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button (for less than two
seconds) on the remote transmitter. The driver’s door will unlock, the
horn will sound two times, the parking lights will flash two times and
the indicator light will go off.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2
Doors and locks
2-15
– CONTINUED –
To unlock all doors (and the rear gate), briefly press the “UNLOCK/
DISARM” button a second time.
n Emergency disarming
If you cannot disarm the system using the transmitter (i.e. the trans-
mitter is lost, broken or the transmitter battery is too weak), you can
disarm the system without using the transmitter.
To disarm the system:
1. Unlock the door with the key and then open the door.
2. The alarm will sound.
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch and cycle it from the “LOCK”
to the “ON” position three (3) times within 5 seconds.
B Sounding a panic alarm
To activate the alarm, keep the “LOCK/ARM” button pressed for more
than two seconds.
To deactivate it, press the “LOCK/ARM” button or “UNLOCK/DISARM”
button.
The parking lights will also flash when the alarm is activated.
Unless a button on the remote is pressed, the alarm will be deacti-
vated after approximately 30 seconds.
B Valet mode
When you choose the valet mode, the security system does not oper-
ate. In valet mode, the remote transmitter is used only for locking and
unlocking the doors (and rear gate) and panic activation.
To enter the valet mode, open the driver’s door and keep the
“UNLOCK/DISARM” button depressed for more than two seconds.
The indicator light repeatedly flashes two times while the system is in
valet mode.
To exit valet mode, open the driver’s door and keep the “UNLOCK/
DISARM” button pressed for more than two seconds. The indicator
will stop flashing.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2-16
B Passive arming
When passive arming mode has been programmed by the dealer,
arming of the system is automatically accomplished without using the
remote transmitter. Note that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE MANU-
ALLY LOCKED.
n To enter the passive mode
WARNING
Do not disconnect or tamper with any yellow connector and/or
any harness covered with yellow insulation and/or tape.
Doing so could result in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag or
could make the SRS airbag system inoperative, which may result
in serious injury.
HB2038BBHB2036BA
1. Remove the side sill cover on the driver’s side.
1) Open the driver’s door.
2) Remove the clip by prying the edge with screwdriver.
3) Remove the side sill cover by pulling it up.
2. Connect the white (1 pole) connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch from the “LOCK” to the “ON” position.
4. Install the side sill cover.
To place the system in active arming mode (remote required for ac-
tivation), disconnect the white connector.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2
Doors and locks
2-17
– CONTINUED –
n Arming the system
CAUTION
In passive mode, the system will automatically activate the alarm
but WILL NOT automatically lock the doors. In order to lock the
doors you must either lock them as indicated in step 4 below or
with the key once they have been closed. Failure to lock the
doors manually will result in a higher security risk.
HS3007BBHB2031BB
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to “LOCK” position and remove
the key from the ignition switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle.
4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors with the inside door lock
levers.
5. Close the doors. The system will automatically arm after one min-
ute.
In the passive mode, the system can also be armed with the remote
transmitter or with the power door locking switches. If the remote
transmitter or power door lock switch is used to lock the vehicle, arm-
ing will take place immediately regardless of whether or not the pas-
sive mode has been selected.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2-18
B Disarming the system
To disarm the system, briefly press the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button on
the transmitter.
B Tripped sensor identification
If the horn sounds four times and the parking lights flash four times
when you disarm the system, this indicates that the alarm was trig-
gered. The number of times the indicator light flashes indicates what
sensor caused the alarm condition.
To enter identification mode:
1. Open the driver’s door and leave it open.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position two times. (“LOCK” →
“ON” → “LOCK” → “ON” → “LOCK”)
3. The indicator light will start flashing.
The indicator light provides the following indications.
Flashing one time: Any door or the rear gate has been opened.
Flashing three times: The impact sensor in the system’s unit has
been activated. This may indicate that your vehicle has been shocked
or tampered with by some outside force and/or unauthorized person.
Flashing four times: The ignition switch has been turned on or the
battery has been disconnected.
To exit this mode, close the door and turn the ignition switch to the
“ON” position.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2
Doors and locks
2-19
– CONTINUED –
Child safety locks
HS0015
Unlock
Lock
WARNING
Always use the child safety lock whenever a child rides in the
rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally
opened the door and fell out.
Each rear door has a child safety lock that prevents the doors from being
opened even if the inside door handle is pulled.
When the child safety lock lever is in the lock position, the door cannot
be opened from inside regardless of the position of the inner door handle
lock lever. The door can only be opened from the outside.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2-20
Power windows
WARNING
D When operating power windows, be extremely careful to pre-
vent anyone’s fingers, arms or head from being caught in the
window.
D Always lock the passengers’ windows using the lock switch
when children are riding in the vehicle.
D Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to
remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result
in injury to a child operating the power window.
The power windows operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
B Power window switch cluster (driver’s side)
HS0017
For front
passenger’s
window
Lock switch
For rear right
passenger’s
window
“AUTO” switch for
driver’s window
For rear left
passenger’s
window
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2
Doors and locks
2-21
– CONTINUED –
HS0018
UnlockLock
Close
Open
Close
Open
Automatically
open
All door windows can be controlled by the power window switch clus-
ter at the driver side door.
n To open or close the driver’s window
AUTO switch: This switch has two functions.
Push the switch down until it clicks and release it, and the window will
fully open. To stop the window halfway, pull the switch up slightly.
Push the switch down lightly and hold it. The window will open as long
as the switch is held.
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The window will close as long as
the switch is held.
n To open or close the passengers’ windows
To open the passengers’ windows, push the appropriate switch down
and hold it until the window reaches the desired position. To close the
window, pull the switch up and hold it until it reaches the desired posi-
tion.
n To lock the passengers’ windows
To lock the passengers’ windows, push the lock switch. When the lock
switch is in the “LOCK” position, the passengers’ windows cannot be
opened or closed.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2-22
B Front passenger’s switch
HS0019
Close
Open
To open the window, push the switch down and hold it until the win-
dow reaches the desired position. To close the window, pull the switch
up and hold it until the window reaches the desired position.
When the lock switch on the power window switch cluster, located on
the driver’s side door, is in the “LOCK” position, the front passenger’s
window cannot be operated with the front passenger’s switch.
B Rear passenger’s switches
HS0020
Open
Close
To open the window, push the switch down and hold it until the win-
dow reaches the desired position. To close the window, push the
switch up and hold it until the window reaches the desired position.
When the lock switch on the power window switch cluster, located on
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2
Doors and locks
2-23
– CONTINUED –
the driver’s side door, is in the “LOCK” position, the rear passengers’
windows cannot be operated with the rear passengers’ switches.
Rear gate
WARNING
D Do not attempt to shut the rear gate while holding the inside
handle. Also avoid closing the rear gate by pulling on the inside
handle from inside the cargo space. There is a danger of your
hand being caught and injured.
D To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the rear gate closed while driving.
HS2009BA
To unlock the rear gate, insert the key in the keyhole and turn it clock-
wise. To lock the rear gate, insert the key in the keyhole and turn it coun-
terclockwise. Since your vehicle is equipped with power door locks, the
rear gate can also be locked and unlocked by operating the driver’s door
lock.
To open the rear gate, first unlock the rear gate lock then pull the outside
handle up.
To close the rear gate, lower it slowly and push down firmly until the latch
engages. The rear gate can be lowered easily if you pull down on the
inside handle as shown in the illustration.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2-24
HS2007BA
Moonroof (if equipped)
WARNING
D Never let anyone’s hands, arms, head or any objects protrude
from the moonroof.
D Before closing the moonroof, make sure that no one’s hands,
arms, head or other objects will be accidentally caught in the
moonroof.
CAUTION
D Do not sit on the edge of the open moonroof.
D Do not operate the moonroof if falling snow or extremely cold
conditions have caused it to freeze shut.
The moonroof operates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2
Doors and locks
2-25
– CONTINUED –
HS0294
Open/close
switch
To open or close the moonroof
Push the upper part of the switch to open the moonroof. The sun shade
also will be opened together with the moonroof. The moonroof will stop at
a position 20 in. (50 cm) away from the fully closed position if you contin-
ue to press on the switch. Release the switch once and push it again to
open the moonroof completely.
Push the lower part of the switch to close the moonroof. The moonroof
will stop at a position 6 in. (15 cm) away from the fully closed position if
you continue to press on the switch. Release the switch once and push it
again to close the moonroof completely.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains, wipe away water on the roof
prior to opening the moonroof to prevent water drops from falling into the
passenger compartment.
NOTE
D For the sake of safety, it is recommended that you avoid driving
with the moonroof opened beyond the initial stop position of 20 in
(50 cm).
D Driving with the moonroof fully open can cause an annoying
sound to generate at high speeds. If such a condition has been
encountered, close the moonroof up to the initial stop position of 20
in. (50 cm).
D If the moonroof cannot be closed through switch operation
because of system failure, it can be closed manually using a hex-
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
2-26
head wrench. For the procedure, refer to “Moonroof — if the moon-
roof cannot be closed” in Chapter 9 “In case of emergency”.
B Sun shade
HS0292
The sun shade can be slid forward or backward by hand while the
moonroof is closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade also moves back.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3
Instruments and controls
Ignition switch 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key reminder chime 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key interlock release (AT vehicles only) 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard warning flasher 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauges 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer/Trip meter 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside temperature indicator (if equipped) 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel gauge 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature gauge 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning and indicator lights 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatbelt warning light and chime 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbag system warning light 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp 3-11. . . . . .
Charge warning light 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil pressure warning light 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AT OIL TEMPerature warning light (for AT vehicles) 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ABS warning light (for vehicles with ABS) 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system warning light 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door open warning lights 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front-wheel drive warning light (for AT vehicles) 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security system status indicator light (if equipped) 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn signal indicator lights 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High beam indicator 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light control switch 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn signals lever 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illumination brightness control 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking light switch 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog light switch (if equipped) 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiper and washer 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and washer switches 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window wiper and washer switch (if equipped) 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window defogger switch 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt steering wheel 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horn 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside mirror 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside mirrors 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3-2
Ignition switch
WARNING
Never turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” while the vehicle is be-
ing driven or towed because that will lock the steering wheel, pre-
venting steering control. And when the engine is turned off, it
takes a much greater effort than usual to steer.
The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK, ACC, ON and START.
HS0122
B LOCK
The key can only be inserted or removed in this position. The ignition
switch will lock the steering wheel when you remove the key.
If turning the key is difficult, turn the steering wheel slightly to the right
and left as you turn the key.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3
Instruments and controls
3-3
– CONTINUED –
n Automatic transmission vehicles:
HS0124HS0123
The key can be turned from “ACC” to “LOCK” only when the selector
lever is in the “P” position.
n Manual transmission vehicles:
HS0125
1
2
The key can be turned from “ACC” to “LOCK” only when the key is
pushed in while turning it.
B ACC
In this position the electrical accessories (radio, accessory power
socket, etc.) can be used.
B ON
This is the normal operating position after the engine is started.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3-4
B START
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the “START” position while the
engine is running.
The engine is started in this position. The starter cranks the engine to
start it. When the key is released (after the engine has started), the
key automatically returns to the “ON” position.
J Key reminder chime
The reminder chime sounds when the driver’s door opens and the key is
in the “LOCK” or “ACC” positions. The chime stops when the key is re-
moved from the ignition switch.
J Key interlock release (AT vehicles only)
If the key can not be turned to the “LOCK” position even when the selec-
tor lever is in the “P” position:
HS0127HS0126
Vehicle
front
Release lever
1. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag.
2. Remove three screws securing the undercover of the steering col-
umn.
3. Remove the under cover of the steering column.
4. Turn the ignition key while pressing the key interlock release lever.
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer immediately to have the
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3
Instruments and controls
3-5
– CONTINUED –
key interlock system repaired.
Hazard warning flasher
HS0053
The hazard warning flasher is used to warn other drivers when you have
to park your vehicle under emergency conditions. The hazard warning
flasher works with the ignition switch in any position.
When you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions, pull off
the roads safely and park away from the traffic if it is possible.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher, push the hazard warning button
on the instrument panel. To turn off the flasher, push the button again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3-6
Gauges
HSF013CB
J Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed.
J Odometer/Trip meter
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to change the function of the in-
dicator during driving, as an accident from inadequate steering
operation could result.
HS3005BB
This meter displays the odometer and two trip meters when the ignition
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3
Instruments and controls
3-7
– CONTINUED –
switch is in the “LOCK”, “ACC” or “ON” position.
To change the mode indication, briefly push the knob.
Each press of the knob changes the function in the following order.
A trip meter B trip meter
B Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle has been driv-
en.
B Double trip meter
The trip meter shows the distance that the vehicle has been driven
since you last set it to zero.
To set the trip meter to zero, select the indication of the A trip or B trip
meter by pushing the knob and keep the knob pushed for more than
2 seconds.
NOTE
If the connection between the combination meter and battery is bro-
ken for any reason such as vehicle maintenance or fuse replace-
ment, the data recorded on the trip meter will be lost.
J Tachometer
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the pointer of the tachometer in
the red zone. In this range, fuel injection will be cut by the engine
control module to protect the engine from overrevving. The en-
gine will resume running normally after the engine speed is re-
duced below the red zone.
The tachometer shows the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute.
J Outside temperature indicator (if equipped)
The outside temperature indicator shows the outside temperature in a
range from –22°F to 122°F (–30°C to 50°C).
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3-8
The indicator can give a false reading under any of the following condi-
tions:
D When there is too much sun.
D During idling; while running at low speeds in a traffic jam; when the
engine is restarted immediately following a shutdown.
D When the actual outside temperature falls outside the specified indi-
cator range.
J Fuel gauge
HS0155
Low fuel warning light
The fuel gauge shows the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the
tank.
The gauge does not return to “E” even though the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position.
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning or acceleration due
to fuel movement in the tank.
B Low fuel warning light
The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is nearly empty
(about 2.3 U.S. gal., 9.0 liters, 1.9 Imp. gal.). It only operates when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3
Instruments and controls
3-9
– CONTINUED –
J Temperature gauge
CAUTION
If the pointer exceeds the normal operating range, safely stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
See “In case of emergency” in this manual.
HS0052
Normal
operating
range
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The coolant temperature will vary in accordance with the outside temper-
ature and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately until the pointer of the tempera-
ture gauge reaches near the middle of the range. Engine operation is opti-
mum with the engine coolant at this temperature range and high revving
operation when the engine is not warmed up enough should be avoided.
Warning and indicator lights
Several of the warning and indicator lights come on momentarily and
then go out when the ignition switch is initially turned to the “ON” posi-
tion. This permits checking the operation of the bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
The following lights come on:
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3-10
Seatbelt warning light
SRS airbag system warning light
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp
Charge warning light
Oil pressure warning light
AT OIL TEMP warning light (automatic transmission vehicles)
ABS warning light (if equipped)
Brake system warning light
If any lights fail to come on, it indicates a burned-out bulb or a malfunc-
tion of the corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.
J Seatbelt warning light and chime
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the seatbelt
warning light will come on and the reminder chime will sound to remind
driver to fasten the seatbelt.
The seatbelt warning light remains on for about six seconds and turns off
automatically after six seconds.
The seatbelt reminder chime will turn off when the driver’s side seatbelt is
buckled or it will turn off automatically after about six seconds.
J SRS airbag system warning light AIRBAG
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the SRS airbag
system warning light will come on for about six seconds and go out. This
shows the SRS airbag system is in normal operation.
If this light comes on while driving or remains illuminated even after a
lapse of about 6 seconds from when the ignition key has been turned on,
it may indicate that the SRS airbag system is not working properly. Con-
tact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3
Instruments and controls
3-11
– CONTINUED –
J CHECK ENGINE warning light/
Malfunction indicator lamp
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE light comes on while you are driving, have
your vehicle checked/repaired by your SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible. Continued vehicle operation without having the
emission control system checked and repaired as necessary
could cause serious damage, which may not be covered by your
vehicle’s warranty.
If this light comes on steadily or blinks while the engine is running, it may
indicate that there is a problem or potential problem somewhere in the
emission control system.
B If the light comes on steadily:
If the light comes on steadily while driving or does not go out after the
engine starts, an emission control system malfunction has been de-
tected.
You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU
dealer immediately.
NOTE
This light also comes on when the fuel filler cap is not tightened
until it clicks.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the cause of the CHECK
ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator lamp coming on could be
a loose or missing fuel filler cap. Remove the cap and retighten it until
it clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with the sealing of the cap.
Tightening the cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE warning light
turn off immediately. It may take several driving trips. If the light does
not go out, take your vehicle to your authorized SUBARU dealer
immediately.
B If the light is blinking:
If the light is blinking while driving, an engine misfire condition has
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3-12
been detected which may damage the emission control system.
To prevent serious damage to the emission control system, you
should do the following:
D Reduce vehicle speed.
D Avoid hard acceleration.
D Avoid steep uphill grades.
D Reduce the amount of cargo, if possible.
D Stop towing a trailer as soon as possible.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light may stop blinking and come on
steadily after several driving trips. You should have your vehicle
checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
J Charge warning light
If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the
charging system is not working properly.
If the light comes on while driving or does not go out after the engine
starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the alterna-
tor belt. If the belt is loose, broken or if the belt is in good condition but
the light remains on, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
J Oil pressure warning light
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the oil pressure warning light on.
This may cause serious engine damage.
If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the
engine oil pressure is low and the lubricating system is not working prop-
erly.
If the light comes on while driving or does not go out after the engine
starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the engine
oil level. If the oil level is low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is at
the proper level but the light remains on, contact your nearest SUBARU
dealer immediately.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3
Instruments and controls
3-13
– CONTINUED –
J AT OIL TEMPerature warning light
(for AT vehicles)
If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the
automatic transmission fluid temperature is too hot.
If the light comes on while driving, it is unnecessary to stop the vehicle,
but avoid driving up steep grades or in stop and go traffic.
B Automatic transmission control system warning
If the light flashes after the engine starts, it may indicate that the auto-
matic transmission control system is not working properly. Contact
your nearest SUBARU dealer for service immediately.
J ABS warning light
(for vehicles with ABS)
The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and goes out after about two seconds.
This is an indication that the ABS system is working properly.
CAUTION
If the warning light behaves as follows, the ABS system may not
work properly. When the warning light is on, the ABS function
shuts down; however, the conventional brake system continues
to operate normally.
D The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position.
D The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position, but it does not go out even when
the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).
D The warning light comes on during driving.
If these occur, have the ABS system repaired at the first available
opportunity by your SUBARU dealer.
(U.S.)
(Canada)
ABS
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3-14
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as shown below, the ABS system
may be considered normal.
D The warning light comes on right after the engine is started but
goes out immediately, remaining off.
D The warning light remains on after the engine has been started,
but it goes out when the vehicle speed reaches about 8 mph (12
km/h).
D The warning light comes on during driving, but it goes out
immediately and remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the
engine is jump started, the ABS warning light may come on. This is
due to the low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction.
When the battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.
J Brake system warning light BRAKE (U.S.)
WARNING
D Driving with the brake system warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system may not be working properly. If
the light remains on, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
D If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating prop-
erly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
This light has the following two functions:
B Parking brake warning
The light comes on with the parking brake applied while the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position. It goes out when the parking brake is
fully released.
B Brake fluid level warning
This light comes on when the brake fluid level has dropped to near
the “MIN” level of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition switch in
(Canada)
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3
Instruments and controls
3-15
– CONTINUED –
the “ON” position and with the parking brake fully released.
If the brake system warning light should come on while driving (with
the parking brake fully released and with the ignition switch posi-
tioned in “ON”), it could be an indication of leaking of brake fluid or
worn brake pads. Have your vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer
immediately.
J Door open warning lights
The door open warning light comes on if any door or the rear gate is not
fully closed.
Always make sure this light is out before you start to drive.
J Front-wheel drive warning light (for AT vehicles)
This light comes on when All Wheel Drive is disengaged and the drive
mechanism is switched to Front Wheel Drive for maintenance or similar
purposes.
J Security system status indicator light
(if equipped)
This light is found at the bottom center of the combination meter panel.
On vehicles equipped with a security system, it blinks to show the driver
the operational status of the security system. For detailed information, re-
fer to the “Security system” in Chapter 2.
J Turn signal indicator lights
These lights show the operation of the turn signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink rapidly, the turn signal bulb
may be burned out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Refer to “Re-
placing bulbs” section in Chapter 11.
J High beam indicator
This light shows that the headlights are in the high beam mode.
This indicator light also comes on when operating headlight flasher.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3-16
Light control switch
WARNING
To prevent battery discharge resulting from accidentally leaving
your lights on when your vehicle is parked, the light switch oper-
ates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. In any
other position, the vehicle’s lights will be out. If you park your ve-
hicle on a roadside at night, use the hazard warning flasher to
alert the other drivers.
HS0054 HS0055
Dimmer
Headlight flasher
The light switch operates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
B Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on the end of the turn signal
lever.
first position
Parking lights, instrument panel illumination, tail lights and license
plate light are on.
second position
Headlights, parking lights, instrument panel illumination, tail lights,
and license plate light are on.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3
Instruments and controls
3-17
– CONTINUED –
B High/low beam change (dimmer)
To change from low beam to high beam, push the turn signal lever
forward. When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indi-
cator light “a” on the instrument panel is also on.
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever back to the detent position.
B Headlight flasher
CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing position for more than just a
few seconds.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever toward you and then release it.
The high beam will stay on for as long as you hold the lever. The
headlight flasher works even though the lighting switch is in the “OFF”
position.
When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indicator light
“a” on the instrument panel also comes on.
B Daytime running light system
WARNING
The tail lights, parking lights, and side marker lights are not
turned on by the daytime running light system. The light switch
must always be turned to the “a” position when it is dark out-
side.
The low beam headlights will automatically come on at reduced
brightness when the engine has started, under the following condi-
tions:
D The parking brake is fully released.
D The automatic transmission selector lever is set at other than
the “P” position.
D The light switch is in the “OFF” position.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3-18
Turn signals lever
HS0056
Right turn
Left turn
To activate the right turn signal, push the turn signal lever up. To activate
the left turn signal, push the turn signal lever down. When the turn is fin-
ished, the lever will return automatically. If the lever does not return after
cornering, return the lever to the neutral position by hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn signal lever up or down slightly
and hold it during the lane change. The turn signal indicator lights will
flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. The lever will return auto-
matically to the neutral position when you release it.
Illumination brightness control
HS0057
Brighten
Darken
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3
Instruments and controls
3-19
– CONTINUED –
When the lighting switch is in the “p” or “a” position, you can adjust
brightness of the instrument panel illumination for better visibility.
To brighten, turn the control dial counterclockwise.
To darken, turn the control dial clockwise.
Parking light switch
HS0058
The parking light switch operates regardless of the ignition switch posi-
tion.
By pushing the front end of this switch, following lights will come on.
– Parking lights
– Front side marker lights
– Tail lights
– License plate lights
To turn off, push the rear end of the parking light switch.
Avoid leaving these lights on for a long time because that will run down
the battery.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3-20
Fog light switch (if equipped)
The fog lights operate only when the headlights are on low beam.
Push the fog light switch to turn the fog lights on.
Press the switch again to turn them off.
HB2025BB
The indicator light located on the switch will illuminate when the fog
lights are on.
Wiper and washer
WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the windshield washer until the
windshield is sufficiently warmed by the defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can freeze on the windshield, blocking
your view.
CAUTION
D Do not operate the washer continuously for more than ten se-
conds, or when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause
overheating of the washer motor. Check the washer fluid level fre-
quently, such as at fuel stops.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3
Instruments and controls
3-21
– CONTINUED –
D Do not operate the wipers when the windshield or rear window
is dry. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and
cause the wiper motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on
a dry windshield or rear window, always use the windshield
washer.
D In freezing weather, be sure that the wiper blades are not fro-
zen to the windshield or rear window before switching on the
wipers. Attempting to operate the wiper with the blades frozen to
the window glass could cause not only the wiper blades to be
damaged but also the wiper motor to burn out. If the wiper blade
is frozen to the window glass, be sure to operate the defroster,
wiper deicer (if equipped) or rear window defogger before turning
on the wiper.
D If the wipers stop during operation because of ice or some oth-
er obstruction on the window, the wiper motor could burn out
even if the wiper switch is turned off. If this occurs, promptly stop
the vehicle in a safe place, turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position and clean the window glass to allow proper wiper opera-
tion.
D Use clean water if windshield washer fluid is unavailable. In
areas where water freezes in winter, use SUBARU Windshield
Washer Fluid or the equivalent. (See “Windshield washer fluid”
section in chapter 11.)
Also, when driving the vehicle when there are freezing tempera-
tures, use non-freezing type wiper blades.
D Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzene. This will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
NOTE
D The wiper operates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
or “ACC” position.
D Clean your wiper blades and window glass periodically with a
washer solution to prevent streaking, and to remove accumulations
of road salt or road film. Keep the washer button depressed at least
for 1 second so that washer solution will be sprinkled all over the
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3-22
windshield or rear window.
D Grease, wax, insects or other material on the windshield or the
wiper blades results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the
glass. If you cannot remove those streaks after operating the
washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of
the windshield or rear window and the wiper blades using a sponge
or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After
cleaning, rinse the window glass and wiper blades with clean water.
The glass is clean if no beads form on the glass when you rinse with
water.
D If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this pro-
cedure, replace the wiper blades with new ones. Refer to the “Wiper
blade replacement” section (chapter 11) for replacement instruc-
tions.
J Windshield wiper and washer switches
B Windshield wipers
HB2019BB
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper control lever down.
: Intermittent
LO : Low speed
HI : High speed
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to the “OFF” position.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3
Instruments and controls
3-23
– CONTINUED –
B Wiper intermittent time control (if equipped)
HB2023BA
When the wiper switch is in the “ ” position, turn the dial to adjust
the operating interval of the wiper.
Operating interval can be adjusted continuously from the shortest
interval to the longest.
Two click stop positions of the dial may help you to aim at your
desired interval.
B Mist (for a single wipe)
For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the lever toward you. The wipers
operate until you release the lever.
B Washer
HB2020BA
To wash the windshield, push the washer button at the end of the wip-
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3-24
er control lever. The washer fluid sprays until you release the washer
button. The wipers operate while you push the button.
J Rear window wiper and washer switch
(if equipped)
HS3009BB
B Rear wiper
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on the end of the wiper control
lever upward.
INT : Intermittent
ON : Normal
To turn the wiper off, return the knob on the end of the lever to the
“OFF” position.
B Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear wiper is operating, turn the
knob on the end of the wiper control lever upward to the “
” posi-
tion. The washer fluid sprays until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is not in use, turn the
knob on the end of the wiper control lever downward to the “
”
position. The washer fluid sprays and the wiper operates until you re-
lease the knob.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3
Instruments and controls
3-25
– CONTINUED –
Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
CAUTION
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the
windshield wiper deicer continuously for any longer than neces-
sary.
The windshield wiper deicer operates only when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position.
HB2027BB
Before turning on the windshield wiper deicer, remove any snow from the
windshield. To turn on the windshield wiper deicer, push the switch. The
indicator light located on the switch lights up while the windshield wiper
deicer is operating.
The windshield wiper deicer will automatically shut off after about 15 min-
utes. If the wiper blades have been deiced completely before that time,
push the switch to turn it off. It also turns off when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. If deicing is not complete when
you restart your vehicle, you have to push the switch to turn the deicer
on again.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3-26
Rear window defogger switch
CAUTION
D Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing
abrasives to clean the inner surface of the rear window. They may
damage the conductors printed on the window.
D To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate
the defogger continuously for any longer than necessary.
The rear window defogger operates only when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position.
HS0063
Indicator light
To turn on the defogger, push the switch. To turn it off, push the switch
again.
The indicator light located on the switch lights up while the rear window
defogger is operating.
The defogger will automatically shut off after about 15 minutes. If the win-
dow clears before that time, push the switch to turn it off. It also turns off
when the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. If
defrosting or defogging is desired when you restart your vehicle, you
have to push the switch to turn it on again.
NOTE
If your vehicle is equipped with the outside mirror defogger, the out-
side mirror defogger operates while the rear window defogger is
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3
Instruments and controls
3-27
– CONTINUED –
operating.
Tilt steering wheel
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt position while driving. This
may cause loss of vehicle control and result in personal injury.
B Tilt adjustment
HS0134
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to “Front seat” section (chapter 1).
2. Pull the tilt lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired level.
4. Push the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked by moving it
up and down.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3-28
Horn
OM-H2736
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
Mirrors
Always check that the inside and outside mirrors are properly adjusted
before you start driving.
J Inside mirror
HB4003BB
The inside mirror has a day and night position. Pull the tab at the bottom
of the mirror toward you for the night position. Push it away for the day
position. The night position reduces glare from headlights.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3
Instruments and controls
3-29
– CONTINUED –
B Compass mirror (if equipped)
HB6019BB
The inside electronic compass mirror has an anti-glare feature which
automatically reduces glare coming from headlights of vehicles be-
hind you. It also contains a built-in compass.
D By pressing and releasing the left button, the automatic dimming
function is toggled on or off. When the automatic dimming function is
on, the auto dimming indicator light (green) located to the right of the
button will illuminate.
D By pressing and releasing the right button, the compass display is
toggled on or off. When the compass is on, an illuminated compass
reading will appear in the lower part of the mirror.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode, the mirror surface turns bright
if the transmission is shifted into reverse. This is to ensure good rear-
ward visibility during reversing.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3-30
n Photosensors
HB6020BA
The mirror has a photosensor attached on both the front and back
sides. If the glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you strikes
the mirror, these sensors detect it and make the reflection surface of
the mirror dimmer to help prevent you from being blinded. For this
reason, use care not to cover the sensors with stickers, or other simi-
lar items. Periodically wipe the sensors clean using a piece of dry soft
cotton cloth or an applicator.
n Compass calibration
1. For optimum calibration, switch off all nonessential electrical ac-
cessories (rear window defogger, heater/air conditioning system,
spotlight, etc.) and ensure all doors are shut.
2. Drive to an open, level area away from large metallic objects or
structures and make certain the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
3. Press and hold the left button for 3 seconds then release, and the
compass will enter the calibration mode. “CAL” and direction will be
displayed.
4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL” disappears from the display
(about two or three circles).
5. The compass is now calibrated. Further calibration is not required.
The compass will automatically calibrate from this point forward.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3
Instruments and controls
3-31
– CONTINUED –
n Compass zone adjustment
HB6021AB
1. The zone setting is factory preset to Zone 8. Refer to the “Com-
pass calibration zone” map shown above or one attached to the end
of this manual to verify that the compass zone setting is correct for
your geographical location.
2. Press and hold the right button for 3 seconds then release, and the
word “ZONE” will briefly appear and then the zone number will be dis-
played.
3. Press the right hand button repeatedly to cycle the display through
all possible zone settings. Stop cycling when the correct zone setting
for your location is displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will exit the zone setting mode.
J Outside mirrors
WARNING
Objects look smaller in a convex mirror (passenger side) and far-
ther away than when viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the con-
vex mirror to judge the distances of vehicles behind you when
changing lanes. Use the inside mirror (or glance backwards) to
determine the actual size and distance of objects that you view in
the convex mirror.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3-32
HS0065
B Remote control mirror switch (if equipped)
The remote control mirrors operate only when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” or “ACC” position.
HS3008BB
1. Press either end of the selection switch, “L” for the left and “R” for
the right.
2. Move the direction control switch in the direction you want to move
the mirror.
3. Return the selection switch to the neutral position to prevent
unintentional operation.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
3
Instruments and controls
3-33
– CONTINUED –
B Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
CAUTION
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the
defogger continuously for any longer than necessary.
The outside mirror defogger shares the switch with rear window
defogger.
The outside mirror defogger operates only when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position.
HS0063
Indicator light
To turn on the outside mirror defogger, push the switch. To turn it off,
push the switch again.
The indicator light located on the switch is on while the outside mirror
defogger is operation. The defogger will automatically shut off after
about 15 minutes. If the mirror clears before that time, push the switch
to turn it off. It also turns off when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position. If defrosting or defogging is desired when
you restart your vehicle, you have to push the switch to turn it on
again.
NOTE
While the outside mirror defogger is operating, the rear window
defogger also operates
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
4
Climate control
Ventilator 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating and air conditioning control system 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater operation 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioner operation 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating tips for heater and air conditioner 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air filtration system (if equipped) 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
4-2
Ventilator
Move the thumb-wheel up and down or
right and left to adjust the air flow direction
HS0070
Move the thumb-wheel up and down or
right and left to adjust the air flow direction
Move the thumb-wheel
up and down or right
and left to adjust the
air flow direction
Oepn
Close
Oepn
Close
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
4
Climate control
4-3
– CONTINUED –
B Air flow section
HS0081
HS0079
HS0077
HS0073
HS0075
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
4-4
Heating and air conditioning control system
B Control panel
HS4001BC
1. Temperature control dial
2. Air inlet selection lever
3. Air flow control dial
4. Air conditioner button (if equipped)
5. Fan speed control lever
n Temperature control dial
This dial regulates the temperature of air flow from the air outlets over
a range from the blue area (cool) to red area (warm).
n Fan speed control lever
The fan operates only when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position. The fan speed control lever is used to select four fan
speeds.
n Air flow control dial
This dial has the following five positions:
: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets.
: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets and the foot
outlets.
: Air flows through the foot outlets and some through the wind-
shield defroster outlets.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
4
Climate control
4-5
– CONTINUED –
: Air flows through the windshield defroster outlets and foot
outlets.
: Air flows through the windshield defroster outlets.
n Air conditioner button (if equipped)
HS4003BB
The air conditioner operates only when the engine is running.
Push the air conditioner button while the fan is in operation to turn on
the air conditioner. The indicator light will come on.
Push it again to turn off the air conditioner.
n Air inlet selection lever
WARNING
Continued operation in the “ ” position may fog up the win-
dows. Switch to the “
” position as soon as the outside
dusty condition clears.
: Interior air is recirculated inside the passenger compartment.
: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
4-6
J Heater operation
B Defrosting or defogging the windshield
HS0072
To direct warm air to the windshield and front door windows:
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the “
” position.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “
” position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial all the way to the right.
4. Set the fan speed control lever to the highest speed.
NOTE
Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To
stop warm air flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding
thumb-wheel to the “
” position.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
4
Climate control
4-7
– CONTINUED –
B Heating and defrosting
HS0074
To direct warm air toward the floor and the windshield:
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the “
” position.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “
” position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the most comfortable level.
4. Set the fan speed control lever to the desired speed.
NOTE
Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To
stop warm air flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding
thumb-wheel to the “
” position.
B Heating
HS0076
To direct warm air toward the floor:
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
4-8
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the “
” position
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “
” position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the most comfortable level.
4. Set the fan speed control lever to the desired speed.
NOTE
Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To
stop warm air flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding
thumb-wheel to the “
” position.
B Bi-level heating
HS0078
This setting allows you to direct air of different temperatures from the
instrument panel and foot outlets. The air from the foot outlets is
slightly warmer than from the instrument panel outlets.
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the “
” position.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “
” position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the desired temperature level.
4. Set the fan speed control lever to the desired speed.
Setting the temperature control dial fully turned to the red area or blue
area decreases the temperature difference between the air from the
instrument panel outlets and the air from the foot outlets.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
4
Climate control
4-9
– CONTINUED –
B Ventilation
WARNING
Continued operation in the “ ” position may fog up the win-
dows. Switch to the “
” position as soon as the outside
dusty condition clears.
HS0080
To force outside air through the instrument panel outlets:
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the “
” position.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “
” position.
3. Set the temperature control dial all the way left.
4. Set the fan speed control lever to the desired speed.
When driving on a dusty road, set the air inlet selection lever to the
“
” position.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
4-10
J Air conditioner operation
B Cooling or dehumidifying
HS0082
ON position
For cooling and dehumidification of the passenger compartment, air
flows through the instrument panel outlets:
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the “
” position.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “
” position.
3. Push the air conditioner button to the “ON” position.
4. Set the temperature control dial to the blue area.
5. Set the fan speed control lever at the highest speed.
B Defrosting or defogging
HS0072
ON position
To direct warm air to the windshield and front door windows:
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the “
” position.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
4
Climate control
4-11
– CONTINUED –
2. Set the air outlet control dial to the “ ” position.
3. Push the air conditioner button to the “ON” position.
4. Set the temperature control dial to the red area.
5. Set the fan speed control lever at the highest speed.
Operating tips for heater and air conditioner
B Cleaning ventilator grille
HS0083
Ventilator inlet grille
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free of snow, leaves, or oth-
er obstructions to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. Since the
condenser is located in front of the radiator, this area should be kept
clean because cooling performance is impaired by any accumulation
of insects and leaves on the condenser.
B Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with the windows open for a few
minutes to allow outside air to circulate into the heated interior. This re-
sults in quicker cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the windows
closed during the operation of the air conditioner for maximum cooling
efficiency.
B Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant circuit
Operate the air conditioner compressor at a low engine speed (at idle
or low driving speeds) a few minutes each month during the off-sea-
son to circulate its oil.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
4-12
B Checking air conditioning system before summer season
Check the air conditioner unit for refrigerant leaks, hose conditions,
and proper operation each spring. This check is best performed by
your SUBARU dealer.
B Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and low tempera-
ture weather condition
Under certain weather conditions (high relative humidity, low tempera-
tures, etc.) a small amount of water vapor emission from the air outlets
may be noticed during cooling or dehumidifying. This condition is nor-
mal and does not indicate any problem with the air conditioning sys-
tem.
B Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine is heavily
loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage, the air conditioner com-
pressor is designed to temporarily shut off during air conditioner op-
eration whenever the accelerator is fully depressed. Such as during
rapid acceleration or when driving on a steep upgrade.
B Refrigerant for your climate control system
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly refrigerant HFC134a. There-
fore, the method of adding, changing or checking the refrigerant is
different from the method for CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU
dealer for service. Repairs needed as a result of using the wrong re-
frigerant are not covered under warranty.
Air filtration system (if equipped)
If your vehicle’s air conditioning system is equipped with a optional air
filtration system, replace the filter element according to the replacement
schedule shown below. This schedule should be followed to maintain the
filter’s dust collection ability. Under extremely dusty conditions, the filter
should be replaced more frequently. Since the filter element is a viscous
type, it is unnecessary to clean or wash the element. It is recommended
that you have your filter checked or replaced by your SUBARU dealer.
For replacement, use only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
4
Climate control
4-13
– CONTINUED –
Replacement schedule:
Every 12 months or 7,500 miles (12,000 km) whichever comes first
NOTE
The filter can influence the air conditioning, heating and defroster
performance.
B Replacement procedure
HS4007BB
HS0254
Old filter
1. Remove the filter cover from the cooling unit by removing the two
(2) clips with a blade screwdriver and unhooking the hinge. The
screwdriver must be inserted into the top of the clip. Do not pry the
middle on the clip.
2. Remove the old filters.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
4-14
HS4004BB
3. Insert the front filter assembly in the cooling unit, then install the
rear filter assembly.
NOTE
D Hold the filter tabs to facilitate installation.
D The passenger compartment side of each filter is marked with
arrows (indicating “UP” and the direction of air flow). Ensure the
arrows point in the correct directions.
D Ensure each filter assembly’s tongues and grooves fit the cor-
responding cooling unit and matching filter tongues and grooves.
HS4005BB
4. Reinstall the cover and secure it using the clips.
NOTE
Ensure no air leaks from the cooling unit through the cover.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
4
Climate control
4-15
– CONTINUED –
HS4006BB
5. Fill in the maintenance label with the replacement date and mile-
age.
6. Install it on the left hand side of the instrument panel as shown.
D The filter must be replaced every 7,500 mile (12,000 km) or 1
year.
D The filter may need to be replaced more frequently in dusty
areas.
7. Install the caution label on the left hand side of the instrument pan-
el next to the maintenance label as shown above.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
Antenna system 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of accessories 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio set 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type A audio set (if equipped) 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type B audio set (if equipped) 5-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type C audio set (if equipped) 5-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD player (if equipped) 5-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In-dash 6 CD auto changer 1 (if equipped) 5-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions to observe when handling
a compact disc (CD) 5-47
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-2
Antenna system
CAUTION
Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface of the window on which the
antenna is printed. Doing so may damage the antenna printed on
the window.
The antenna is printed on the inside of the left side rear quarter window
glass.
HS5000BB
B FM reception
Although FM is normally static free, reception can be affected by the
surrounding area, atmospheric conditions, station strength and trans-
mitter distance. Buildings or other obstructions may cause momentary
static, flutter or station interference. If reception continues to be unsat-
isfactory, switch to a stronger station.
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing a citizen band ra-
dio or other transmitting device in your vehicle. Such devices may cause
the electronic control system to malfunction if they are incorrectly
installed or if they are not suited for the vehicle.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-3
– CONTINUED –
Audio set
Your SUBARU may be equipped with one of the following audio sets.
See the pages indicated in this section for operating details.
B Type A audio set
HS5003AA
D Radio operation: refer to page 5-6
D Cassette player operation: refer to page 5-9
D CD player control: refer to page 5-11
D CD changer control: refer to page 5-14
B Type B audio set
HS5005AA
D Radio operation: refer to page 5-17
D Compact disc player operation: refer to page 5-20
D CD changer control: refer to page 5-23
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-4
B Type C audio set
HS5004AA
D Radio operation: refer to page 5-26
D Cassette player operation: refer to page 5-31
D Built in CD changer operation: refer to page 5-34
D CD changer control: refer to page 5-39
B CD player (Optional audio unit — if equipped)
HB5039AA
D Inserting and removing a disc: refer to page 5-42
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-6
Type A audio set (if equipped)
The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
Radio operation
HS5003BB
1 Power switch/Volume, Tone,
Balance, Fader control dial
2 AUDIO button
3 BAND button
4 Tuning buttons
5 Preset buttons
6 SCAN button
B Power switch and volume/bass/treble/fader/balance control
n Power switch and volume control (PWR/VOL)
The dial
1 is used for both power (ON/OFF) and volume control. The
radio is turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial and the volume is
controlled by turning the dial.
n Tone and balance control (AUDIO)
The volume control dial
1 normally functions as a volume control.
This dial becomes a control for Bass, Treble, Fader or Balance when
you select the appropriate tone and balance control mode.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-7
– CONTINUED –
Choose desired volume level for each mode by turning the volume
control dial. The control function returns to volume control mode after
about 5 seconds.
To change control modes: Each brief press of the “AUDIO” button
2 changes control modes in the following sequence starting from vol-
ume control mode. (When the radio is first turned on, the control mode
is in the volume control.)
Volume Bass Treble Fader Balance
The “AUDIO” button 2 is used for selecting the following control
modes:
Display Control mode
HB5036BA
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
BAS Bass control For less bass For more bass
TRE Treble control For less treble For more treble
FAd Fader control To increase rear speaker
volume and decrease front
speaker volume
To increase front speaker
volume and decrease rear
speaker volume
BAL Balance control To increase left speaker
volume and decrease right
speaker volume
To increase right speaker
volume and decrease left
speaker volume
VOL Volume control For less volume For more volume
B Waveband selection
Push the “BAND” button
3 to select FM1, FM2 or AM reception. The
display indicates which one is currently selected.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-8
B Stereo indicator
The stereo indicator “ST” will come on when an FM stereo broadcast
is received.
B Tuning (TUNE)
n Manual tuning (TUNE)
Press the tuning button
4 marked “Y” to increase the tuning frequen-
cy and press the tuning button marked “B” to decrease it.
Each time the button is pressed, the frequency interval can be
changed between 10 kHz in the AM mode and 0.2 MHz in the FM
mode.
Constant pressure on the button causes a continuous change in the
frequency.
n Automatic tuning (SCAN)
Press the “SCAN” button
6 to change the radio to the SCAN mode. In
this mode, the radio scans through the radio band until a station is
found. The radio will stop at the station for five seconds while display-
ing the frequency, after which scanning will continue until the entire
band has been scanned from the low end to the high end.
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel the SCAN mode and to stop
on any displayed frequency.
When the “SCAN” button is pressed for automatic tuning, stations are
scanned in the direction of low frequencies to high frequencies only.
Automatic tuning may not function properly if the station reception is
weakened by distance from the station or proximity to tall buildings
and hills.
B Selecting preset stations
Presetting a station with a “preset button”
5 allows you to select that
station in a single operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and FM2 stations
each may be preset.
B How to preset stations
1. Press the “BAND” button
3 to select FM1, FM2 or AM reception.
2. Press the “SCAN” button or tune the radio manually until the
desired station frequency is displayed.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-9
– CONTINUED –
3. Press one of the preset buttons for more than 2 seconds to store
the frequency. At this time, there will momentarily be no sound from
the radio. If the button is pressed for less than 2 seconds, the preced-
ing selection will remain in memory.
NOTE
If the connection between the radio and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or radio removal, all stations
stored in the preset buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is neces-
sary to reset the preset buttons.
Cassette player operation
HS5003CB
7 Cassette slot
8 Eject button
9 TAPE button
Q TPS (Tape Program Search)
W Repeat button
E Fast-forward button
R Rewind button
T Dolby B NR button
Y Program button
NOTE
D Only use good quality cassettes (cassettes longer than C-90 are
not recommended).
D Put cassettes back in their boxes immediately after use to protect
them from dust and dirt and to prevent the tape from unwinding.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-10
D Never expose cassettes to heat, direct sunlight or moisture.
D Clean the tape head (once or twice a month) using a wet-type
cleaning cassette.
B Cassette slot
Insert a cassette with the exposed tape side facing to the right. After
insertion, playback starts.
B TAPE button
Press the “TAPE button”
9 when the cassette left in the cassette slot
is to be played back again.
B Tape travel indicators
These indicate the direction the cassette tape is moving.
" : Indicates that the top side of the cassette is being played back.
A : Indicates that the bottom side of the cassette is being played
back.
B Program button (PROG)
When the program button
Y is pressed during playback, the tape
travel indicators will switch and the player will begin playing back the
opposite side of the tape. The same mechanism is automatically acti-
vated when the end of the tape is reached. This allows the opposite
side of the tape to play, providing continuous playback.
B Fast-forward button (FF)
To fast-forward the tape, press the “FF” button
E. To stop fast-for-
warding, lightly press the “
” 8 button.
B Rewind button (REW)
To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button
R. To stop rewinding,
lightly press the “
” 8 button.
B Eject button (
)
When “
” button 8 is pressed, playback stops and the cassette
tape is ejected.
The ejection function is also active when the ignition switch is in the
“LOCK” position. Always make certain that you remove the cassette
tape.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-11
– CONTINUED –
B Repeat (RPT)
Press the “RPT” button
W while a song is playing to play the song
repeatedly. The “RPT” indicator will come on and the song will be
played continuously. To cancel the repeat mode, press the button
again. Then the “RPT” indicator goes out, and normal playback mode
is restored.
B Dolby B NR button (
)
Press the “
” button T when playing tapes recorded using the
Dolby NR system*. The “
” indicator will light up and high-frequen-
cy noise on the tape will be reduced for clearer sound reproduction.
*Noise reduction system manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and the double-D Symbol are trade marks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
CD player control (If optional CD player is connected)
An optional CD player can be connected to this audio unit. See your
SUBARU dealer for more information. For procedures for loading and un-
loading CDs, refer to “CD player 1” in this chapter.
HS5003DB
U CD button
I RAND (Random) button
O RPT (Repeat) button
P Track selection buttons
A SCAN button
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-12
B To start playback
n When CD is not in the CD player
Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole while gripping the edge of
the disc, then insert it in to the slot (with the label side up) on the CD
player and the player will automatically pull the disc into position.
After insertion, the CD player mode indicator “CD” will come on and
playback will start.
n When CD is in the CD player
Press the “CD” button
U. The “CD” indicator will come on, and the
track number will appear on the display and the CD player will start
playback.
NOTE
D If the “CD” button is pressed during a radio broadcast, the
disc will interrupt the broadcast.
D After playback on the last song finishes, the player will auto-
matically return to track 1 (the first song on the disc).
B To select a song from its beginning
Briefly press the “""❚” button
P to skip to the beginning of the next
track and briefly press the “❚AA” button to skip to the beginning of
the current track.
B Fast-forwarding and fast-reverse
Press the “""❚” button
P continuously for more than a half second
to fast-forward the disc.
Press the “❚AA” button continuously for more than a half second to
fast reverse the disc.
Release the button to stop fast forwarding or fast reverse.
B Repeat
Press the “RPT” button
O while a song is playing to play the song
repeatedly. The “RPT” indicator will come on and the song will be
played continuously. To cancel the repeat mode, press the button
again. Then the “RPT” indicator goes out, and normal playback mode
is restored.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-13
– CONTINUED –
B Random playback
Press the “RAND” button
I while a disc is being played back to play
all songs on the disc in a random order. The “RAND” indicator will
come on and all songs on the disc will be played in a random order.
To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the
“RAND” indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.
B Scan (a convenient way to become familiar with a disc)
1. Press the “SCAN” button
A.
– The display shows “SCAN” and the track number being
scanned.
– You hear the first 10 seconds of each track.
– The operation is automatically cleared after playing all pro-
grams. Then, normal playback starts.
2. Press the “SCAN” button again when you hear a track you like.
– Normal playback resumes.
B To stop playback
To stop playback and switch over to the radio mode, press the
“BAND” button. To stop playback and switch over to the cassette
player mode, press the “TAPE” button.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-14
CD changer control (If optional in dash CD changer is
connected)
An optional CD changer can be connected to this audio unit. See your
SUBARU dealer for more information. For procedures for loading and un-
loading CDs, refer to “In-dash 6 CD auto changer” in this chapter.
HS5003EB
S CD button
D Disc up/down buttons
F RAND (Random) button
G RPT (Repeat) button
H Track selection buttons
J SCAN button
B To start playback
Press the “CD” button
S. The “CD” indicator will come on and the
disc number will appear on the display and the CD changer will start
playback.
NOTE
D If the “CD” button is pressed during a radio broadcast, the CD
changer will interrupt the broadcast.
D At the end of the disc, playback automatically continues with
the next disc.
D After playback on the last disc finishes, the player will auto-
matically return to the first disc.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-15
– CONTINUED –
D If you have loaded fewer than 6 discs, any missing disc is
automatically skipped.
B Selection of a desired disc
Briefly press the “Y” button
D to skip to the next disc and briefly
press the “B” button to skip to the previous disc.
n Operation with the in-dash CD changer unit
Press the desired “Disc select” button (numbered from 1 to 6) and the
disc will begin to play.
B To select a song from its beginning
Briefly press the “""❚” button
H to skip to the beginning of the next
track and briefly press the “❚AA” button to skip to the beginning of
the current track.
B Fast-forwarding and fast-reverse
Press the “""❚” button
H continuously for more than a half second
to fast-forward the disc.
Press the “❚AA” button continuously for more than a half second to
fast reverse the disc.
Release the button to stop fast forwarding or fast reverse.
B Repeat
Press the “RPT” button
G while a song is playing to play the song
repeatedly. The “RPT” indicator will come on and the song will be
played continuously. To cancel the repeat mode, press the button
again. Then the “RPT” indicator goes out, and normal playback mode
is restored.
B Random playback
Press the “RAND” button
F while a disc is being played back to play
all songs on the disc in a random order. The “RAND” indicator will
come on and all songs on the disc will be played in a random order.
To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the
“RAND” indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-16
B Scan (a convenient way to become familiar with a disc)
1. Press the “SCAN” button J.
– The display shows “SCAN” and the track number being
scanned.
– You hear the first 10 seconds of each track.
– The operation is automatically cleared after playing all pro-
grams. Then, normal playback starts.
2. Press the “SCAN” button again when you hear a track you like.
– Normal playback resumes.
B To stop playback
To stop playback and switch over to the radio mode, press the
“BAND” button. To stop playback and switch over to the cassette
player mode, press the “TAPE” button.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-17
– CONTINUED –
Type B audio set (if equipped)
The radio will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
Radio operation
HG5008BC
1 SCAN button
2 Power switch, Volume control,
Bass/Middle/Treble control and
Fader/Balance control dial
3 Tuning buttons
4 FM/AM selection button
5 Preset buttons
6 Tone/Balance button
B Power switch and volume/bass/treble/fader/balance control
(PWR/VOL)
The dial
2 is used for both power (ON/OFF) and volume control. The
radio is turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial and the volume is
controlled by turning the dial.
n Tone and balance control
The “VOLUME” control knob normally function as volume control. This
knob become a control for Treble, Bass, Fader or Balance when you
select the appropriate audio mode.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-18
Choose desired volume level for each mode by turning the “VOL-
UME” control knob. The control function returns to volume control
mode after about 5 seconds.
To change control modes: Each brief press of the “T/B” button
changes control modes in the following sequence starting from vol-
ume control mode. (When the radio is first turned on, the control mode
is in the volume control.)
Volume
(VOL)
Bass
(BAS)
Treble
(TRE)
Fader
(FAD)
Balance
(BAL)
Display Control mode
HB5036BA
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
BAS
Bass control For less bass For more bass
TRE
Treble control For less treble For more treble
BAL
Balance control To increase left speaker
volume and decrease right
speaker volume
To increase right speaker
volume and decrease left
speaker volume
FAD
Fader control To increase rear speaker
volume and decrease front
speaker volume
To increase front speaker
volume and decrease rear
speaker volume
VOL
Volume control For less volume For more volume
B FM/AM selection button (FM/AM)
Push the “FM/AM” button
4 when the radio is off to turn on the radio.
Push the “FM/AM” button when the radio is on to select FM1, FM2 or
AM reception. Each time this button is pressed, the band will change
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-19
– CONTINUED –
in the following order:
FM1 FM2
AM
The display indicates which one is currently selected.
B Stereo indicator
The stereo indicator “ST” will come on when an FM stereo broadcast
is received.
B Manual tuning (TUNE)
Push the tuning button
3 marked “∧” to increase the tuning frequen-
cy and press the tuning button marked “
∨” to decrease it.
Each time the button is pressed, the frequency changes 10 KHz in the
AM waveband and 0.2 MHz in the FM waveband.
Constant pressure on the button causes a continuous change in the
frequency.
B Automatic tuning (SCAN)
Press the “SCAN” button
1 to change the radio to the SCAN mode. In
this mode, the radio scans through the radio band until a station is
found. The radio will stop at the station for five seconds while display-
ing the frequency, after which scanning will continue until the entire
band has been scanned from the low end to the high end.
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel the SCAN mode and to stop
on any displayed frequency.
When the “SCAN” button is pressed for automatic tuning, stations are
scanned in the direction of low frequencies to high frequencies only.
Automatic tuning may not function properly if the station reception is
weakened by distance from the station or proximity to tall buildings and
hills.
B Selecting preset stations
Presetting a station with a preset button
5 allows you to select that
station in a single operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and FM2 stations
each may be preset.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-20
B How to preset stations
1. Press the “FM/AM” selection button to select AM, FM1 or FM2 re-
ception.
2. Press the “SCAN” button
1 or tune the radio manually until the de-
sired station frequency is displayed.
3. Press one of the preset buttons
5 for at least 2 seconds to store
the frequency. The frequency of the station will flash once on the dis-
play at this time. If the button is pressed for less than 2 seconds, the
preceding selection will remain in memory.
NOTE
If the connection between the radio and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or radio removal, all stations
stored in the preset buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is neces-
sary to reset the preset buttons.
Compact disc player operation
HG5008CC
7 Eject button
8 Disc slot
9 DISC button
Q Repeat/Random button
W Track selection buttons
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-21
– CONTINUED –
B To play back a compact disc
n When CD is not in the player
Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole while gripping the edge of
the disc, then insert it in to the slot (with the label side up) and the
player will automatically pull the disc into position.
A single CD (8 cm/3 inch CD) may also be used without any adapter.
NOTE
D Make sure to always insert a disc with the label side up. If a
disc is inserted with the label side down, it might be ejected or
the player might shut off.
D After the last song finishes, the player will automatically return
to track 1 (the first song on the disc).
n When CD is in the player
Press the “DISC” button
9. The display will show “CD” and the player
will start playback.
NOTE
After the last song finishes, playback will automatically return to
track 1 (the first song on the disc).
B To select a song from its beginning
n Forward direction
Briefly press the “
∧” button W to skip to the beginning of the next
track. Each time the button is pressed, the indicated track number will
increase.
n Backward direction
Briefly press the “
∨” button W to skip to the beginning of the current
track. Each time the button is pressed, the indicated truck number will
decrease.
B Fast forwarding and fast reverse
n Fast forwarding
Press the “
∧” button W continuously for more than 1 second to fast
forward the disc.
Release the button to stop fast forwarding.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-22
n Fast reverse
Press the “∨” button W continuously for more than 1 second to fast
reverse the disc.
Release the button to stop fast reverse.
B Repeat playback
Press the “RPT/RDM” button
Q and release it in less than 2 seconds
while a song is playing to play the song repeatedly. The “RPT” indica-
tor will come on and the song will be played continuously. To cancel
the repeat mode, press the button again. Then the “RPT” indicator
goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.
B Random playback
Press the “RPT/RDM” button
Q and hold it in for more than 2 seconds
while a disc is being played back to play all songs on the disc in a
random order. The “RDM” indicator will come on and all songs on the
disc will be played in a random order.
To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the “RDM”
indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.
B To eject a disc from the player
When a disc is being played back or when a disc is in the player,
press the eject button “
” 7. The disc will be ejected.
The disc may be removed even when the ignition switch is in the
“LOCK” position.
NOTE
Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out, because vibra-
tion might make it fall out.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-23
– CONTINUED –
CD changer control
(If optional in-dash CD changer is connected)
An optional CD changer can be connected to this audio unit. See your
SUBARU dealer for more information.
HG5008DC
E Track selection buttons
R DISC button
T Repeat/Random button
Y Disc selection button
B To start playback
When the “CD” button
R is pressed, the CD changer will start play-
back. The display shows the current disc number, track number and
the elapsed time during playback.
NOTE
D If a disc is in the player, the “DISC” button is used to change
from CD player operation to DISC changer operation. Each time
the “DISC” button is pressed, the operating mode will change al-
ternately.
D At the end of the disc, the player automatically continues with
the next disc.
D After playback on the last disc finishes, playback will automat-
ically return to the first disc.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-24
D If you have loaded fewer than 6 discs, any missing disc is
automatically skipped.
B Selection of a desired disc
You can select a desired disc from among the discs contained in the
magazines only by pressing the corresponding number one of the
disc select buttons. If you are to listen to the 7th disc in the double
magazine (12 discs), for example, it is selected first by selecting “M2”
(“M2” means 2nd magazine) with the “DISC” button and then press-
ing the “1” button of the disc select buttons. All other discs in the
magazines can also be selected in a similar way.
NOTE
D No disc change takes place if the button corresponding to the
magazine slot in which no disc is loaded is pressed.
D If the direct disc button corresponding to the disc now in play-
back is pressed again, the disc will be replayed from its begin-
ning.
B To select a song from its beginning
n Forward direction
Briefly press the “
∧” button E to skip to the beginning of the next
track. Each time the button is pressed, the indicated track number will
increase.
n Backward direction
Briefly press the “
∨” button E to skip to the beginning of the current
track. Each time the button is pressed, the indicated track number will
decrease.
B Fast forwarding and fast reverse
n Fast forwarding
Press the “
∧” button E continuously for more than 1 second to fast
forward the disc.
Release the button to stop fast forwarding.
If you continue fast forwarding to the end of the disc, the CD changer
will automatically stop fast forwarding and start playback beginning
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-25
– CONTINUED –
with the first track on the current disc.
n Fast reverse
Press the “
∨” button E continuously for more than 1 second to fast
reverse the disc.
Release the button to stop fast reverse.
If you continue fast reverse to the beginning of the disc, the CD
changer will automatically stop fast reverse and start playback begin-
ning with the first track on the current disc.
B Repeat playback
Use this to play a certain track repeatedly. During playback, press the
“RPT/RDM” button
E and release it in less than 2 seconds. The “RPT”
indicator will come on and the song will be played continuously. To
cancel the repeat mode, press the button again. Then the “RPT” indi-
cator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.
B Random playback
Use this to play the tracks on the disc in random order. During play-
back, press the “RPT/RDM” button
T and hold it in for more than 2
seconds. The “RDM” indicator will come on and all songs on the disc
will be played in a random order.
To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the “RDM”
indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-26
Type C audio set (if equipped)
The radio will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
Radio operation
HS5004BB
1 FM button
2 AM button
3 SCAN button
4 Tuning knob
5 Preset buttons
6 Fader/Balance selection
button
7 Power switch, Volume control,
Bass/Treble control and
Fader/Balance control dial
8 Bass/Treble selection button
B Power switch and volume/bass/treble/fader/balance control
(PWR/VOL)
The dial
7 is used for both power (ON/OFF) and volume control. The
radio is turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial and the volume is
controlled by turning the dial.
This dial is used for bass/treble controls when the “BAS/TRE” button
8 is in the depressed position. It is also used for fader/balance con-
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-27
– CONTINUED –
trols when the “BAL/FAD” button 6 is in the depressed position.
Display Control mode
HB5036BA
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
BAS Bass control For less bass For more bass
TRE Treble control For less treble For more treble
BAL Balance control To increase left speaker
volume and decrease right
speaker volume
To increase right speaker
volume and decrease left
speaker volume
FAd Fader control To increase rear speaker
volume and decrease front
speaker volume
To increase front speaker
volume and decrease rear
speaker volume
VOL Volume control For less volume For more volume
n Tone control
The volume control dial
7 normally function as volume control. The
dial become a control for Bass or Treble when you select the ap-
propriate tone control mode.
Choose desired level for each mode by turning the volume control
dial. The control function returns to volume control mode after about 5
seconds.
To change control modes: Each brief press of the “BAS/TRE” button
8 changes control modes in the following sequence starting from
bass control mode. (When the radio is first turned on, the control
mode is in the volume control.)
Bass Treble Volume
(BAS) (TRE) (VOL)
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-28
n Fader and balance control
The volume control dial 7 normally function as volume control. The
dial become the controls for Fader or Balance when you select the
appropriate fader and balance control mode.
Choose desired setting for each mode by turning the volume control
dial. The control function returns to volume control mode after about 5
seconds.
To change control modes: Each brief press of the “FAD/BAL” button
6 changes control modes in the following sequence starting from
fader control mode. (When the radio is turned on, the control mode is
in the volume control.)
Balance Fader Volume
(BAL) (FAd) (VOL)
B FM/AM selection button
Push the “FM”
1 or “AM” 2 button when the radio is off to turn on the
radio.
Push the “FM” or “AM” button when the radio is on to select FM1, FM2
or AM reception.
B Stereo indicator
The stereo indicator “ST” will come on when an FM stereo broadcast
is received.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-29
– CONTINUED –
B Manual tuning (TUNE)
HS5005BA
n Manual tuning
Turn the tuning knob
4 clockwise and release it immediately to
increase the tuning frequency and turn the tuning knob counterclock-
wise and release it immediately to decrease the tuning frequency.
Each time the knob is turned, the frequency changes 10 kHz in the
AM waveband and 0.2 MHz in the FM waveband.
n Seek tuning
Turn the tuning knob
4 and hold it for more than a half second. Seek
tuning will operate and stop automatically on the next station.
Continue this operation until you find the desired station.
B Automatic tuning (SCAN)
Press the “SCAN” button
3 to change the radio to the SCAN mode. In
this mode, the radio scans through the radio band until a station is
found. The radio will stop at the station for five seconds while display-
ing the frequency, after which scanning will continue until the entire
band has been scanned from the low end to the high end.
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel the SCAN mode and to stop
on any displayed frequency.
When the “SCAN” button is pressed for automatic tuning, stations are
scanned in the direction of low frequencies to high frequencies only.
Automatic tuning may not function properly if the station reception is
weakened by distance from the station or proximity to tall buildings and
hills.
"" : Tuning to a higher
frequency
AA : Tuning to a lower
frequency
""❚ : Seeking the next
higher station
❚AA :Seeking the next
lower station
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-30
B Selecting preset stations
Presetting a station with a preset button 5 allows you to select that
station in a single operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and FM2 stations
each may be preset.
B How to preset stations
1. Press the “FM/AM” selection button to select AM, FM1 or FM2 re-
ception.
2. Press the “SCAN” button
3 or tune the radio manually until the de-
sired station frequency is displayed.
3. Press one of the preset buttons
5 for at least 1.5 seconds to store
the frequency. The frequency of the station will flash once on the dis-
play at this time. If the button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds, the
preceding selection will remain in memory.
NOTE
If the connection between the radio and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or radio removal, all stations
stored in the preset buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is neces-
sary to reset the preset buttons.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-31
– CONTINUED –
Cassette player operation
HS5004CB
9 Cassette slot
Q Eject button
W Repeat button
E TAPE (cassette player
selection) button
R TPS button
T Dolby B NR button
Y Fast forward button
U Program switching button
I Rewind button
NOTE
D Only use good quality cassettes (cassettes longer than C-90 are
not recommended).
D Put cassettes back in their boxes immediately after use to protect
them from dust and dirt and to prevent the tape from unwinding.
D Never expose cassettes to heat, direct sunlight or moisture.
D Clean the tape head (once or twice a month) using a wet-type
cleaning cassette.
B To play back a cassette tape
n When cassette tape is not in the player
When a cassette is partially inserted, it is automatically drawn in and
starts tape playback.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-32
n When cassette tape is in the player
When the “TAPE” button E is pressed, the display will show “PLAY”
and the player will start playback.
B Tape travel indicators
These indicate the direction the cassette tape is moving.
" : indicates that the top side of the cassette is being played back.
A : indicates that the bottom side of the cassette is being played
back.
B Program switching button (PROG)
When the program switching button “PROG”
U is pressed during
playback, the tape travel indicators will switch and the player will be-
gin playing back the opposite side of the tape. The same mechanism
is automatically activated when the end of the tape is reached. This
allows the opposite side of the tape to play, providing continuous
playback.
B Fast-forward button (FF)
To fast-forward the tape, press the “FF” button
Y. The display will
show “FF”. To stop fast-forwarding, press the “FF” or “TAPE”
E button.
B Rewind button (REW)
To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button
I. The display will indi-
cate “REW”. To stop rewinding, press the “REW” or “TAPE”
E button.
B Eject button (
)
When “
” button Q is pressed, play back stops and the cassette
tape is ejected.
The ejection function also operates when the ignition switch is in the
“LOCK” position. Always make certain that you remove the cassette
tape.
B Tape program sensor button (TPS)
n Blank skip
When the “TPS” button
R is pressed, the “TPS” indicator will come on
and the player will automatically skip any blank portion of 15 second
or more and play the next program, even if it is on the other side. To
cancel blank skip mode, press the “TPS” button again.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-33
– CONTINUED –
n Blank search
Press “TPS” button
R during playback to return to the beginning of
the current selection or to skip to the beginning of the next selection.
To use this function, press the “TPS” button to turn on the “TPS” indi-
cator. If the fast-forward button “FF”
Y is then pressed, the player ad-
vances the tape to the beginning of the next selection and starts play-
ing it. If the rewind button “REW”
I is pressed instead, the player
rewinds the tape to the beginning of the current selection and starts
replaying it. The “TPS” function may not operate properly under the
following conditions:
D When the recording level is low.
D When there are long pauses in the middle of a selection.
D When the tape contains verbal material such as conversations.
D When the blanks between selections are shorter than five seconds.
D When there are no blanks between selections (live concerts, etc.).
B Repeat button (RPT)
Push the “RPT” button
W to repeat the piece of music being listened
to. To use this function, push the “RPT” button while the piece you
want to hear again is being played. “RPT” will be indicated on the dis-
play. When the selection ends, the cassette player automatically re-
winds to the beginning of the piece and the selection begins again.
To cancel the repeat function, push the “RPT” button again. Until the
repeat function is cancelled, the same piece of music will be repeated
indefinitely. The “RPT” function may not operate properly under the
following conditions:
D When the recording level is low.
D When there are long pauses in the middle of a selection.
D When the tape contains verbal material such as conversations.
D When the blanks between selections are shorter than five seconds.
D When there are no blanks between selections (live concerts, etc).
B Dolby B NR button (
)
Press “
” button T when playing tapes recorded using the Dolby
NR system*. The “
” indicator will light up and high-frequency
noise on the tape will be reduced for clearer sound reproduction.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-34
* Noise reduction system manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and the double-D Symbol are trade marks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
B Auto metal sensor
The cassette player automatically adjusts for metal or CrO
2
tape.
Built in CD changer operation
HS5004DB
O LOAD button
P SCAN button
A Disc slot
S CD button
D Eject button
F Random button
G Fast forward/Fast reverse
and track UP/DOWN knob
H Repeat button
J Disc select button
NOTE
Make sure to always insert a disc with the label side up. If a disc
is inserted with the label side down, it might be ejected or the
player might shut off.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-35
– CONTINUED –
B How to insert a CD(s)
n Inserting a CD
1. Press “LOAD” button
O. If the magazine in the player has an idle
position where you can insert a disc, the “DISC” indicator associated
with the idle position will blink.
If no indicator blinks, it means that there is no idle position in the mag-
azine.
2. As soon as the “DISC” indicator begins to blink, the “IN” will ap-
pear on display for a period of 15 seconds. Insert a disc during the
period. The disc will be then automatically drawn in, and the player
will begin to play back the first number of the disc.
D To insert more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1 and 2. The
magazine will be loaded with discs in the ascending order of position
number.
If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds after you have pressed the
“LOAD” button, the player will begin to play back the first number of
the last disc you have inserted.
D The disc indicator steadily lights up if a disc is already inserted in
the corresponding position of the magazine.
D While the player is in the loading mode, if you press any of the oth-
er mode buttons “FM”
2, “AM” 1 and “TAPE” E, the player will enter
the standby mode. Press the “CD” button
S to start playback.
n Inserting a disc in a desired position
1. Press the “LOAD” button. If the magazine in the player has an idle
position where you can insert a disc, the “DISC” indicator associated
with the idle position will blink.
The positions in the magazine the indicator of which steadily lights up
are already loaded with discs.
2. Press the “DISC SELECT” button
J at the position where you want
to insert a disc. The associated “DISC” indicator will blink, and the
“IN” will be displayed.
3. If you insert a disc during the 15-second period while the “IN” is on
display, the disc will be automatically drawn in, and the player will
start playback of the disc, beginning with the first number.
D To insert more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1 and 2.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-36
D While the player is in the loading mode, if you press any of the oth-
er mode buttons “FM” 2, “AM” 1 and “TAPE” E, the player will enter
standby mode. Press the “CD” button to start playback.
n Loading all the magazine (Full disc loading mode)
1. If you continue to press the “LOAD” button for more than 1.5 se-
conds, the player will produce beep sound and will enter the full disc
loading mode.
2. A “DISC” indicator will blink, and the “IN” will be on display for a
period of 15 seconds. If a disc is successfully loaded during this peri-
od, the “DISC” indicator will stop blinking and will steadily light.
3. When the loading of a disc is complete, the next “DISC” indicator
will blink. Then repeat Step 2.
4. When the magazine is filled with discs by repeating Steps 2 and 3,
the player will start playback of the discs, beginning with the one in-
serted first.
If you fail to insert any disc during each 15-second interval, the full
disc loading mode will be canceled, and the player will start playback
of the disc inserted first.
B How to play back a CD or make a pause
n When there is no CD inserted:
Insert a CD by referring to “How to Insert a CD(s)”.
When a CD is loaded, the player will start playback of the CD, begin-
ning with the first number.
n When there are CDs loaded:
Press a desired one of the “DISC SELECT” buttons
J the “DISC” indi-
cator of which steadily lights up. The player will then start playback of
the selected CD, beginning with the first number.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-37
– CONTINUED –
B Selecting a desired track (TRACK)
HS5005BA
n Skipping forward
Turn the “TRACK” knob
G clockwise and release it immediately to
skip to the beginning of the next track. Each time the knob is turned
and released, the indicated track number will increase.
n Skipping backward
Turn the “TRACK” knob
G counterclockwise and release it immedi-
ately to skip to the beginning of the current track. If you continue to
turn and release the knob, the indicated truck number will decrease.
n Fast forwarding
Turn the “TRACK” knob
G clockwise and hold it continuously for more
than 2 seconds to fast forward the disc.
Release the knob to stop fast forwarding.
n Fast reversing
Turn the “TRACK” knob
G counterclockwise and hold it continuously
for more than 2 seconds to fast reverse the disc.
Release the knob to stop fast reverse.
B Repeat playback
Press the “RPT” button
H while a song is playing to play the song
repeatedly. The “RPT” indicator will come on and the song will be
played continuously. To cancel the repeat mode, press the button
again. Then the “RPT” indicator goes out, and normal playback mode
is restored.
""❚ : Skipping forward
❚AA :Skipping backward
"" : Fast forwarding
AA : Fast reversing
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-38
B Random playback
Press the “RDM” button F while a disc is being played back to play
all songs on the disc in a random order. The “RDM” indicator will
come on and all songs on the disc will be played in a random order.
To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the “RDM”
indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.
B Scan
When the “SCAN” button
P is pressed while the disc is being played
back, you can hear the first 10 seconds of each track to seach for the
desired program. To continue listening to the program, press the
“SCAN” button again. After all tracks on the disc have been scanned,
normal playback mode is restored.
B How to unload CDs from the player
n Ejecting a CD from the player
Of the discs loaded, you can select and remove only one disc.
1. Press the “DISC SELECT” button
J of the disc whose “DISC” indi-
cator is ON.
2. Press the “EJECT” button
D. Then the “DISC” indicator associated
with the disc you have selected will blink, and the disc will be ejected.
To remove more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1 and 2.
n Ejecting all discs from the player (All disc ejection mode)
1. If you continue to press the “EJECT” button
D, the player will pro-
duce beep sound and will enter the all disc ejection mode.
2. Remove the disc that has been ejected. The other discs loaded
will then be ejected one after another. If you do not remove the disc
that has been ejected, the “All disc ejection mode” will be canceled.
NOTE
Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out, because vibra-
tion might make it fall out.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-39
– CONTINUED –
CD changer control (If optional in dash CD changer is
connected)
An optional CD changer can be connected to this audio unit. See your
SUBARU dealer for more information. For procedures for loading and un-
loading CDs, refer to “In-dash 6 CD auto changer” in this chapter.
HS5004EB
K SCAN button
L RPT (Repeat) button
Z CD button
X RAND (Random) button
C Fast forward/Fast reverse
and track UP/DOWN knob
V Disc select buttons
B To start playback
Press the “CD” button
Z two times. The “CD” indicator will come on
and the disc number will appear on the display and the CD changer
will start playback.
NOTE
D If the “CD” button is pressed during a radio broadcast, the CD
changer will interrupt the broadcast.
D At the end of the disc, playback automatically continues with
the next disc.
D After playback on the last disc finishes, the player will auto-
matically return to the first disc.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-40
D If you have loaded fewer than 6 discs, any missing disc is
automatically skipped.
B Selection of a desired disc
Press the desired “Disc select” buttons
V (numbered from 1 to 6) and
the disc will begin to play.
B Selecting a desired track (TRACK)
HS5005BA
n Skipping forward
Turn the “TRACK” knob
C clockwise and release it immediately to
skip to the beginning of the next track. Each time the knob is turned
and released, the indicated track number will increase.
n Skipping backward
Turn the “TRACK” knob
C counterclockwise and release it immedi-
ately to skip to the beginning of the current track. If you continue to
turn and release the knob, the indicated truck number will decrease.
n Fast forwarding
Turn the “TRACK” knob
C clockwise and hold it continuously for
more than 2 seconds to fast forward the disc.
Release the knob to stop fast forwarding.
If you continue fast forwarding to the end of the disc, the CD changer
will automatically stop fast forwarding and change to the next disc.
""❚ : Skipping forward
❚AA :Skipping backward
"" : Fast forwarding
AA : Fast reversing
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-41
– CONTINUED –
n Fast reversing
Turn the “TRACK” knob
C counterclockwise and hold it continuously
for more than 2 seconds to fast reverse the disc.
Release the knob to stop fast reverse.
If you continue fast reverse to the beginning of the disc, the CD
changer will automatically stop fast reverse and start playback begin-
ning with the first track on the current disc.
B Repeat
Press the “RPT” button
L while a song is playing to play the song
repeatedly. The “RPT” indicator will come on and the song will be
played continuously. To cancel the repeat mode, press the button
again. Then the “RPT” indicator goes out, and normal playback mode
is restored.
B Random playback
Press the “RAND” button
X while a disc is being played back to play
all songs on the disc in a random order. The “RAND” indicator will
come on and all songs on the disc will be played in a random order.
To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the
“RAND” indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.
B Scan (a convenient way to become familiar with a disc)
1. Press the “SCAN” button
K.
– The display shows “SCAN” and the track number being
scanned.
– You hear the first 10 seconds of each track.
– The operation is automatically cleared after playing all pro-
grams. Then, normal playback starts.
2. Press the “SCAN” button again when you hear a track you like.
– Normal playback resumes.
B To stop playback
To stop playback and switch over to the radio mode, press the
“BAND” button. To stop playback and switch over to the cassette
player mode, press the “TAPE” button.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-42
CD player (if equipped)
HB5039BB
1 Disc slot
2 Disc indicator
3 Eject button
CAUTION
D Use only music CDs identified by mark.
D Do not use CDs listed below which could cause damage to the
CD player.
D Any disc with a peel-off or seal on it.
D Any disc with scratches and/or dust.
D Bent disc.
D Cleaning disc.
D CD accessory. (E.g., 3-inch (8 cm) disc adapter)
D Do not insert or remove any disc when the automatic transmis-
sion selector lever is in the park position; the selector lever in
that position can interfere with disc insertion or removal, causing
scratches on the disc surface (for AT vehicles).
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-43
– CONTINUED –
B To insert a disc
Be sure to hold a disc with the label side (the side where titles are
printed) up.
Push the disc into the slot.
The disc will be automatically set in position by the auto-loading
mechanism and begin playing.
The disc indicator will turn on as the CD begins playing.
n Disc indicator
Lit: A disc is in the slot (When the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position).
OFF: No disc is loaded or the ignition switch is in the “Lock” position.
B To remove disc left in slot
Simply press the “Eject button”
3 and the disc will be ejected. This
procedures is effective even when the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”
position.
n Function control
Refer to CD player control operating instructions described in the
“Type A audio set” section.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-44
In-dash 6 CD auto changer 1 (if equipped)
HB5040BB
1 Disc slot
2 Disc indicators (disc No.1 to 6)
3 Disc select buttons
(disc No.1 to 6)
4 Eject button
CAUTION
D Do not attempt to insert two or more discs into the slot at a
time. Doing so can cause mechanical damage to the CD changer.
D Use only music CDs identified by a
mark.
D Do not use CDs listed below which could cause damage to the
CD player.
D 3-inch (8 cm) compact disc.
D Any disc with a peel-off or seal on it.
D Any disc with scratches and/or dust.
D Bent disc.
D Cleaning disc.
D CD accessory. (E.g., 3-inch (8 cm) disc adapter)
D Do not insert or remove any disc when the automatic transmis-
sion selector lever is in the park position; the selector lever in
that position can interfere with disc insertion or removal, causing
scratches on the disc surface (for AT vehicles).
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-45
– CONTINUED –
B To insert a disc
1. Press one of the “Disc select” buttons
3 (numbered from 1 to 6)
for which the disc indicator light
2 is “OFF”.
The Disc indicator lights are located directly above the corresponding
“Disc select” buttons.
2. The indicator will begin blinking. The blinking will last for 15 se-
conds.
During this period, insert a desired disc, and the disc will begin to
play. (If any disc is not inserted during this period, the “Disc slot”
1
door will close. Repeat step 1.)
Be sure to hold a disc with the label side (the side where titles are
printed) up.
3. To insert another disc, repeat step 1 and 2 choosing a different
disc select button.
B To insert six discs at a time
1. Press and hold the “Disc select” button number 1 until all disc indi-
cators begin blinking (about 1.5 seconds).
2. The indicators will blink for 15 seconds. During this period, insert
desired six discs.
3. When all discs are loaded, the first disc will begin to play. (If no
disc is inserted within this 15 seconds, the entire disc load sequence
will be canceled.)
B To remove a disc
1. Press the desired one of the “Disc select” buttons
3 (numbered
from 1 to 6) for which the disc indicator light is on.
2. Press the “Eject button”
4. The selected disc will be ejected and
the indicator light will begin blinking.
3. To remove another disc, repeat step 1 and 2 choosing a different
“Disc select” button.
(To remove discs when the ignition switch is in the “Lock” position,
press the “Eject” button, and the first disc will be ejected. Press the
“Eject” button again, and the next disc will be ejected and so on. At
this time, the “Disc select” buttons are disabled.)
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5-46
B To remove all discs at one time
1. Press and hold the “Eject” button 4 until all “Disc” indicators begin
blinking (about 1.5 seconds), and the first disc will be ejected.
2. When the disc is removed, the next one will be ejected, and so on.
B To replace a playing disc with another
Simply press the desired one of “Disc select” buttons
3 (numbered
from 1 to 6) or press the “DISC UP” or “DISC DOWN” button on the
radio unit to select the desired disc, and the disc will begin to play.
B Disc indicators
Lit: when the corresponding storage tray is occupied by a disc.
Blinking: Disc player is either in loading, eject or changing mode.
OFF: No disc is loaded or the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” position.
B Function control
Refer to CD player control operating instructions described in the
“Type A audio set” or “Type C audio set” section.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
5
Audio
5-47
– CONTINUED –
Precautions to observe when handling a compact
disc (CD)
D To remove a disc from the case, press the center of the case and hold
both edges of the disc. If the disc surface is touched directly, contamina-
tion could cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the disc surface.
D Use a clean disc whenever possible. If there are deposits, wipe the
disc surface from the center outward with a dry, soft cloth. Be sure not to
use a hard cloth, thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc.
D Never use a badly damaged, deformed or cracked disc. Malfunctions
or problems might result.
D A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never keep it either in places exposed to
direct sunlight, near heaters or in vehicles parked in the sun or hot days.
OM-4747
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6
Interior equipment
Sun visors 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vanity mirror (if equipped) 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove compartment 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center console 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overhead console 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dashboard storage compartment (if equipped) 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door storage compartment 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coin tray 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holder 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessory power socket 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter (if equipped) 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtray 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coat hook 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior light 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spotlight 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo area light 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage cover (if equipped) 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shopping bag hook 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo anchorage eyelets 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Under floor storage tray 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6-2
Sun visors
HS0089HS0088
To block out glare, swing down the visors. To use the sun visor at a side
window, swing it down and move it sideways.
J Vanity mirror (if equipped)
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the visor and open the cover.
Storage compartment
CAUTION
D Always keep the storage compartment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stops or an acci-
dent.
D Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corro-
sive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage compart-
ment.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6
Interior equipment
6-3
– CONTINUED –
J Glove compartment
HS0090
Unlock
Lock
To open the glove compartment, pull the handle. To close it, push the lid
firmly upward.
To lock the glove compartment, insert the master key and turn it clock-
wise. To unlock it, insert the masterkey and turn it counterclockwise.
J Center console
HS0091
To open the lid, pull up the lock release.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6-4
J Overhead console
CAUTION
When your vehicle is in the sun or a warm day, the inside of the
overhead console heats up. Avoid storing plastic or other heat-
vulnerable or flammable articles such as a lighter in the overhead
console.
HS0092
Push
To open the console, push the button and the console lid will automati-
cally open.
J Dashboard storage compartment (if equipped)
HS0094
Push
To open the dashboard compartment, push the button and pull up on the
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6
Interior equipment
6-5
– CONTINUED –
lid. Be sure to close the compartment fully before driving.
J Door storage compartment
HS0095
Push
Each door is equipped with a door storage compartment.
To open the compartment, push the button and pull up on the lid.
J Coin tray
HS0096
To open the coin tray, pull the upper edge of the lid.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6-6
Cup holder
CAUTION
D When not in use, always keep the holder stored while driving
to reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden stop or an
accident.
D Do not pick up a cup from the cup holder or put a cup in the
holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
D Take care to avoid spills. Beverages, if hot, might burn you or
your passengers. Spilled beverages may also damage upholstery,
carpets or audio equipment.
B In instrument panel
HS6018BA
To use the cup holder, pull it out completely.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6
Interior equipment
6-7
– CONTINUED –
B Front passenger’s cup holder
HS0100HS0099
A front passenger’s cup holder is also built in the lid of the center con-
sole. To use the cup holder, open the lid by sliding it forward and un-
fold the arm. Adjust the opening area by sliding the lid forward or
rearward to fit the cup. When not in use, fold the arm and close the
lid.
NOTE
On models equipped with a center console arm rest extension,
the front passenger’s cup holder must be eliminated to provide
this feature.
B Rear passenger’s cup holder
HS0102HS0101
The rear passenger’s cup holder is located at the back of the center
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6-8
console. To use the cup holder, open the lid by pulling its upper edge.
Clock
HS0103
The clock displays the time when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” positions.
B Setting the clock
To set the hour, press the “H” button. To set the minutes, press the “M”
button. To reset the minutes to “00” with a radio time signal, push the
“S” button.
Accessory power socket
B Electrical power socket located on the left-lower part of the
instrument panel
CAUTION
The electrical power socket located on the lower part of the
instrument panel is designed to use only a SUBARU genuine cig-
arette lighter plug. Do not use non-genuine cigarette lighter plugs
or any “plug-in” type electrical accessories in the socket. Doing
so many cause a short-circuit and overheating, resulting in a fire.
Refer to the “Cigarette lighter” section in this chapter.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6
Interior equipment
6-9
– CONTINUED –
B Accessory power socket in the luggage compartment and dual
power socket (if equipped)
CAUTION
D Do not attempt to use a cigarette lighter in the accessory
socket or dual power socket.
D Do not place any foreign objects, especially metal ones such
as coins or aluminum foil, into the accessory socket or dual
power socket. That could cause a short circuit. Always put the
cap on the accessory socket and dual power socket when it is
not in use.
D Use only electrical appliances which are designed for 12V DC
and which consume less than 120W. Overloading the accessory
socket or dual power socket can cause a short circuit. Do not use
double adapters or more than one electrical appliance.
D If the plug on your electric appliance is either too loose or too
tight for the accessory socket or dual power socket, this can
result in a poor contact or cause the plug to get stuck. Only use
plugs that fit properly.
D Use of an electric appliance in the accessory socket or dual
power socket for a long period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
D Before driving your vehicle, make sure that the plug and the
cord on your electrical appliance will not interfere with your shift-
ing gears and operating the accelerator and brake pedals. If they
do, do not use the electrical appliance while driving.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6-10
HS6001BAHS6000BA
Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery is on tap at the socket when
the ignition switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
You can use an in-car use electrical appliance by connecting it to the
socket.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6
Interior equipment
6-11
– CONTINUED –
Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
CAUTION
The electrical power socket located on the lower part of the
instrument panel is designed to use only a SUBARU genuine cig-
arette lighter plug. Do not use non-genuine cigarette lighter plugs
or any “plug-in” type electrical accessories in the socket. Doing
so may cause a short-circuit and overheating, resulting in a fire.
HS0378
The electrical power socket located on the lower part of the instrument
panel can only be used as cigarette lighter socket. A cigarette lighter
plug is an optional accessory. It is available from your SUBARU dealer.
If smoking is not desired, always put the cap on the socket to prevent
any foreign object from entering it.
B Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
WARNING
To avoid being burned, never grasp the lighter by the end with
the heating element. Doing so could result in injury and could
also damage the heating element.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6-12
CAUTION
Do not hold the lighter pushed in, because it will overheat.
HS0106
The cigarette lighter operates only when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” and “ACC” positions.
To use the cigarette lighter, push in the knob and wait a few moments.
It will automatically spring up when ready for use.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6
Interior equipment
6-13
– CONTINUED –
Ashtray
CAUTION
Do not use ashtrays as waste receptacles or leave a lighted ciga-
rette in an ashtray. This could cause a fire.
Fully close the ashtray after using it to help reduce residual smoke.
HS6002BAHS0107
B Front ashtray
To open the ashtray, pull the lid out.
To remove the ashtray for cleaning, open it and pull it out while push-
ing the inner plate down.
B Rear ashtray (if equipped)
To open the ashtray, pull the upper edge of the lid.
To remove the ashtray for cleaning, open it and pull it out while push-
ing the inner plate down.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6-14
Coat hook
CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat hook that might obstruct the
driver’s view or that could cause injury in sudden stops or in a
collision. And do not hang items on the coat hook that weight 2.2
lb (1 kg) or more.
The coat hook is attached to the rear passenger’s hand grip behind the
driver.
HS0109
Interior light
HS6003BBHS0110
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6
Interior equipment
6-15
– CONTINUED –
The interior light switch has three positions:
ON: The light stays on continuously.
Middle position: The light comes on when any door is opened and
stays on for a few seconds after all doors are closed.
OFF: The light stays off.
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the light is turned off to avoid bat-
tery discharge.
Spotlight
HS0111
Switch
To turn on the spotlight, push the switch. To turn it off, push the switch
again.
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the light is turned off to avoid bat-
tery discharge.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6-16
Cargo area light
HS0112
DOOR
OFF
ON
The cargo area light switch has three positions:
ON: The light stays on continuously.
DOOR: The light comes on only when the rear gate is opened.
OFF: The light stays off.
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the light is turned off to avoid bat-
tery discharge.
Luggage cover (if equipped)
WARNING
Do not place anything on the extended cover. Putting excessive
weight on the extended cover can break it and an object on the
cover could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or colli-
sion. This could cause serious injury.
The luggage cover is provided for covering the cargo area and to pro-
tect its contents from direct sunlight. This cover is detachable to make
room for additional cargo.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6
Interior equipment
6-17
– CONTINUED –
B Using the cover
HS6019BA
To extend the cover, pull the end of the cover out of the housing, then
insert its hooks into the catches as shown. To rewind it, unhook it from
the catches and it will rewind automatically. You should hold on to the
cover and guide it back into the cover housing while it is rewinding.
B To remove the cover
HS6020CA
1. Rewind the cover.
2. To take it off the retainer, lift it out.
3. Store the cover housing in the cargo area.
To install the luggage cover, insert both ends of the cover housing into
the retainers.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6-18
Shopping bag hook
HS6016BA
A shopping bag hook is attached to each side of the cargo area. You
can hook a light shopping bag or something similar on it.
Cargo anchorage eyelets
CAUTION
The cargo anchorage eyelets are designed only for securing light
cargo. Never try to secure any cargo which weighs more than the
load capacity of the anchorage eyelets. The maximum load ca-
pacity is about 44 lb. (20 kg) per eyelet.
HS0115
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6
Interior equipment
6-19
– CONTINUED –
The cargo area is equipped with four anchorage eyelets so that cargo
can be secured with a cargo net or ropes.
When using the anchorage eyelets, raise them up. When not in use,
lower the eyelets down.
Under floor storage tray
CAUTION
D Always keep the lid of the storage tray closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stops or an acci-
dent.
D Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corro-
sive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage tray.
HS6023BA
There are four storage trays under the floor of the cargo area. They can
be used to store small items.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6-20
B Front, left and right side storage tray
HS0118HS0117
HS0119
To open the lid, raise the cargo anchorage eyelets and pull the tab
up. The jack and jack handle are stored in the left side storage tray.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
6
Interior equipment
6-21
– CONTINUED –
B Center storage tray
HS6022BAHS6021BA
To open the lid, pull the handle up. To keep the lid open, hang the
hook provided on the backside of the lid on the rear edge of the roof.
The spare tire is stored under the storage tray.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7
Starting and operating
Fuel 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel requirements 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel filler lid and cap 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
State emission testing (U.S. only) 7-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing to drive 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine for a manual transmission vehicle 7-8. . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine for an automatic transmission vehicle 7-9. . . . . .
Starting the engine during cold weather below –4°F (–20 °C) 7-9. . .
Starting a flooded engine 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping the engine 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual transmission 7-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission 7-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector lever 7-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift lock release 7-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear viscous limited slip differential (S models) 7-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power steering 7-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Braking 7-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Braking tips 7-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system 7-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators 7-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) 7-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking your vehicle 7-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control (if equipped) 7-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7-2
Fuel
CAUTION
Use of a fuel which is low in quality or use of an inappropriate
fuel additive may cause engine damage.
J Fuel requirements
B Fuel Octane Rating
Your engine is designed to use only unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating of 87 AKI or higher. This octane rating is the average of the Re-
search Octane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred
to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating can cause persistent and
heavy knocking, which can damage the engine. Do not be concerned
if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or
when you accelerate. See your dealer or a qualified service techni-
cian if you use a gasoline with the specified octane rating and your
vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.
B Unleaded gasoline
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed to accept only an unleaded
gasoline filler nozzle. Under no circumstances should leaded gaso-
line be used because it will damage the emission control system and
may impair driveability and fuel economy.
B Gasoline for California-certified LEV
Your vehicle was certified to California’s low emission vehicle (LEV)
standards as indicated on the underhood tune-up label. It is designed
to optimize engine and emission performance with gasoline that
meets the clean burning low-sulfur California gasoline specifications.
If you live in any other state than California, your vehicle will operate
on gasoline meeting Federal specifications. Gasoline sold outside
California is permitted to have higher sulfur levels, which may affect
the performance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter and may pro-
duce a sulfur exhaust odor or smell. SUBARU recommends that you
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7
Starting and operating
7-3
– CONTINUED –
try a different brand of unleaded gasoline having lower sulfur to deter-
mine if the problem is fuel related before returning your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.
B Gasoline for cleaner air
CAUTION
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels
containing alcohol may cause paint damage, which is not cov-
ered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Your use of gasoline with detergent additives will help prevent depos-
its from forming in your engine and fuel system. This helps keep your
engine in tune and your emission control system working properly,
and is a way of doing your part for cleaner air. If you continuously use
a high quality fuel with the proper detergent and other additives, you
should never need to add any fuel system cleaning agents to your
fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with materials called oxygenates.
Use of these fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. Oxygenated
blend fuels, such as MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your vehicle, but should con-
tain no more than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the proper operation
of your SUBARU.
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now producing reformulated
gasolines, which are designed to reduce vehicle emissions. SUBARU
approves the use of reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains, you should ask your service
station operators if their gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates
and if they have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your vehicle as ex-
plained below.
D Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than
that specified in this manual.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7-4
D Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes mixed with un-
leaded gasoline. Methanol can be used in your vehicle ONLY if it
does not exceed 5% of the fuel mixture AND if it is accompanied by
sufficient quantities of the proper cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors
required to prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not use fuel con-
taining methanol EXCEPT under these conditions.
D If undesirable driveability problems are experienced and you sus-
pect they may be fuel related, try a different brand of gasoline before
seeking service at your SUBARU dealer.
D Fuel system damage or driveability problems which result from the
use of improper fuel are not covered under the SUBARU Limited War-
ranty.
J Fuel filler lid and cap
B Refueling
WARNING
D Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. Before refueling, always
first stop the engine and make sure that there are no lighted ciga-
rettes, open flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area.
D When opening the cap, do not remove the cap quickly. Fuel
may be under pressure and spray out of the fuel filler neck espe-
cially in hot weather, which may cause injury.
CAUTION
D Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of
a cleaning agent may cause damage to the fuel system.
D Make sure that the cap is tightened until it clicks to prevent
fuel spillage in the event of an accident.
D Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle.
Fuels may cause paint damage, which is not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
D Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler cap. If you use the
wrong cap, it may not fit or have proper venting, and your fuel
tank and emission control system might be damaged.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7
Starting and operating
7-5
– CONTINUED –
HS0022
1. To open the fuel filler door, pull it outward. After refueling, be sure
to close the fuel filler door completely.
HB3008BB
2. To take off the fuel filler cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise and
remove the cap.
3. After the fuel filler nozzle has automatically stopped, do not add
more fuel.
4. To put the cap back on, turn it clockwise until you hear a clicking
noise.
Be certain not to catch the cap tether under the cap while tightening.
If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, rinse it off immediately.
Otherwise, the painted surface could be damaged. Such damage is
not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7-6
NOTE
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks or if the tether is
caught under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE warning light may
come on. Refer to the “Warning and indicator lights” section
located in chapter 3.
State emission testing (U.S. only)
WARNING
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle must NEVER be performed
on a single two-wheel dynamometer. Attempting to do so will
result in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an acci-
dent or injuries to persons nearby.
CAUTION
Resultant vehicle damage due to improper testing is not covered
under the SUBARU Limited Warranty and is the responsibility of
the state inspection program or its contractors or licensees.
At state inspection time, remember to tell your inspection or service
station in advance not to place your Subaru AWD vehicle on a two-
wheel dynamometer. Otherwise, serious transmission damage will
result.
Some states have started using dynamometers in their state inspection
programs in order to meet their obligation under federal law to implement
stricter vehicle emission standards to reduce air pollution from cars. A
dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like testing device that allows your
car’s wheels to turn while the car remains in one place. Depending on
the severity of a state’s air pollution problems, the states must adopt
either a “basic” or “enhanced” vehicle emission inspection test. Nor-
mally, a portion of the basic emission test consists of an emission
inspector inserting an analyzer probe into the exhaust pipe of an idling
vehicle for a short period of time. States with more severe air pollution
problems are required to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission test. This
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
77
Starting and operating
7-7
– CONTINUED –
test simulates actual driving conditions on a dynamometer and permits
more accurate measurement of tailpipe emitted pollution than the basic
emission test.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and states using two-
wheel dynamometers in their emission testing programs have
EXEMPTED Subaru AWD vehicles from the portion of the testing pro-
gram that involves a two-wheel dynamometer.
There are some states that use four-wheel dynamometers in their testing
programs. When properly used, that equipment will not damage an AWD
Subaru vehicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear wheels be jacked off the
ground, nor should the driveshaft be disconnected for state emission
testing.
Preparing to drive
You should perform the following checks and adjustments every day be-
fore you start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and lights are clean and unob-
structed.
2. Check the appearance and condition of the tires. Also check tires for
proper inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.
4. Check that the hood, trunk and rear gate are fully closed.
5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
6. Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors.
7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your passengers have fastened their
seatbelts.
8. Check the operation of the warning and indicator lights when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warning lights after starting the en-
gine.
NOTE
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, washer fluid and other fluid
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7-8
levels should be checked daily, weekly or at fuel stops.
Starting the engine
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter motor continuously for more than ten
seconds. If the engine fails to start after operating the starter for
five to ten seconds, wait for ten seconds or more before trying
again.
J Starting the engine for a manual transmission vehicle
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and shift the shift lever into neutral.
Hold the clutch pedal to the floor while starting the engine. The starter
motor will only operate when the clutch pedal is pressed fully to the floor.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and check the operation
of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to the “Warning and indicator
light” section (chapter 3).
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” position without depressing
the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine has
started.
If the engine does not start within ten seconds, wait a while and then turn
the ignition switch to the “START” position again while depressing the ac-
celerator pedal half way down.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have gone off after the
engine has started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the
idle speed as the engine warms up.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7
Starting and operating
7-9
– CONTINUED –
J Starting the engine for an automatic transmission ve-
hicle
CAUTION
If you restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, shift the se-
lector lever into the “N” position. Do not attempt to place the se-
lector lever of a moving vehicle into the “P” position.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” or “N” position (preferably “P” posi-
tion). The starter will only operate when the select lever is at the “P” or
“N” position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and check the operation
of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to the “Warning and indicator
lights” section (chapter 3).
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” position without depressing
the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine has
started.
If the engine does not start within ten seconds, wait a while and then turn
the ignition switch to the “START” position again while depressing the ac-
celerator pedal half way down.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have gone out after the
engine has started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the
idle speed as the engine warms up.
While the engine is warming up, make sure that the selector lever is at
the “P” or “N” position and that the parking brake is applied.
J Starting the engine during cold weather below –4°F
(–20°C)
If the engine is difficult to start using the normal method (without de-
pressing the accelerator pedal), turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position while slightly depressing the accelerator pedal.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7-10
J Starting a flooded engine
If the engine does not start, it may be flooded (excessive fuel in the en-
gine).
In case of a flooded engine, turn the starter motor for five seconds with
the accelerator pedal fully depressed. Repeat this two or three times until
the engine starts. Release the ignition switch and accelerator pedal as
soon as the engine starts.
Stopping the engine
WARNING
Do not stop the engine when the vehicle is moving. This will
cause loss of power to the power steering and the brake booster,
making steering and braking more difficult. It could also result in
accidental activation of the “LOCK” position on the ignition
switch, causing the steering wheel to lock.
The ignition switch should be turned off only when the engine is idling.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7
Starting and operating
7-11
– CONTINUED –
Manual transmission
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the clutch disengaged (i.e., when the
clutch pedal is depressed) or with the shift lever in the neutral
position. Engine braking has no effect in either of these condi-
tions and the risk of an accident is consequently increased.
CAUTION
Shift into reverse ONLY when the vehicle has completely
stopped. It may cause damage to the transmission to try shifting
into reverse when the vehicle is moving.
The manual transmission is a fully synchromeshed 5-forward and 1-re-
verse speed transmission.
HS0128
The shift pattern is shown on the shift lever knob. When shifting from 5th
gear to reverse gear, first return the shift lever to the neutral position then
shift into reverse gear.
To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal, move the shift lever,
and gradually let up on the clutch pedal.
If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the transmission in neutral, release the
clutch pedal momentarily, and then try again.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7-12
B Shifting speed
n Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel economy and vehicle perfor-
mance during normal driving is ensured by shifting up at the speeds
listed in the following table.
Shift up
mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 15 (24)
2nd to 3rd 25 (40)
3rd to 4th 40 (65)
4th to 5th 45 (73)
n Maximum allowable speeds
WARNING
When shifting down a gear, ensure that the vehicle is not travel-
ling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the
gear which is about to be selected. Failure to observe this pre-
caution can lead to engine over-revving and this in turn can
result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of engine brakes when the vehicle
is travelling on a slippery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a
consequence, control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk of
an accident increased.
The following table shows the maximum speeds that are possible with
each different gear. The tachometer’s needle will enter the red area if
these speeds are exceeded.
With the exception of cases where sudden acceleration is required,
the vehicle should not be driven with the tachometer’s needle inside
the red area. Failure to observe this precaution can lead to excessive
engine wear and poor fuel economy.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7
Starting and operating
7-13
– CONTINUED –
mph (km/h)
Vehicle type
Gear
S and L
1st 31 (50)
2nd 52 (83)
3rd 75 (121)
B Driving tips
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and do not use
the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill on an upgrade. Either of
those actions may cause clutch damage.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the shift lever. This may cause
wear on the transmission components.
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle speed due to slow traffic, turn-
ing corners, or driving up steep hills, downshift to a lower gear before
the engine starts to labor.
On steep downgrades, downshift the transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd
gear as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe speed and to extend
brake pad life.
In this way, the engine provides a braking effect. Remember, if you
“ride” (over use) the brakes while descending a hill, they may over-
heat and not work properly.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7-14
Automatic transmission
WARNING
Do not shift from the “P” or “N” position into the “D”, “3”, “2”,
“1” or “R” position while depressing the accelerator pedal. This
may cause the vehicle to jump forward or backward.
CAUTION
D Shift into the “P” or “R” position only after the vehicle is com-
pletely stopped. Shifting while the vehicle is moving may cause
damage to the transmission.
D Do not race the engine for more than five seconds in any posi-
tion except the “N” or “P” position when the brake is set or the
tires are on blocks. This may cause the automatic transmission
fluid to overheat.
D Avoid shifting from one of the forward driving positions into
the “R” position or vice versa until the vehicle has completely
stopped. Such shifting may cause damage to the transmission.
The automatic transmission is electronically controlled with 4-forward
speeds and 1-reverse speed.
NOTE
Immediately after a disconnected battery is reconnected or ATF (au-
tomatic transmission fluid) is replaced, you may feel that the auto-
matic transmission operation is somewhat unusual.
This results from erasure or invalidation of data which the on-board
computer has collected and stored in memory to allow the transmis-
sion to shift at the most appropriate times for the current condition
of your vehicle. Optimized shifting will be restored as the vehicle
continues to be driven for a while.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7
Starting and operating
7-15
– CONTINUED –
J Selector lever
OM-H0149
Release button
With the brake pedal
depressed, shift while
pressing the button in
Shift while pressing
the button in
Shift without pressing
the button
HS0129
The selector lever has seven positions.
The release button must be pushed to select the “P”, “R”, or “2” posi-
tions.
B P (Park)
This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the engine.
In this position, the transmission is mechanically locked to prevent the
vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first set the parking brake fully, then shift
into the “P” position. Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmis-
sion.
A shift interlock function is employed in the automatic transmission
system to ensure safe starting of the vehicle.
To shift the selector lever from the “P” to the any other position, you
have to depress the brake pedal fully then push the release button on
the selector lever when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. This
prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is started.
If the shift lever does not move from the “P” position with the brake
pedal depressed and the release button pushed in, refer to the “Shift
lock release” section in chapter 3.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7-16
B R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle.
To shift from the “N” to “R” position, first stop the vehicle completely
then move the lever to the “R” position while pushing the release but-
ton.
B N (Neutral)
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the selector lever in the “N” (neutral)
position. Engine braking has no effect in this condition and the
risk of an accident is consequently increased.
This position is for restarting a stalled engine.
In this position the wheels and transmission are not locked. In this
position, the transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll freely, even on
the slightest incline unless the parking brake or foot brake is on.
Avoid coasting with the transmission neutral.
During coasting, the engine braking does not act.
B D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving.
The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to
4th according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require.
When more acceleration is required in this position, press the acceler-
ator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission
will automatically downshift to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release
the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.
n While climbing a grade
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to 4th gear is prevented from
taking place when the accelerator is released. This minimizes the
chance of subsequent downshifting to a lower gear when accelerat-
ing again. This prevents repeated upshifting and downshifting result-
ing in a smoother operation of the vehicle.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7
Starting and operating
7-17
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
The transmission may downshift to 2nd or 1st gear, depending on
the way the accelerator pedal is pressed to accelerate the vehicle
again.
n While going down a hill
When descending a steep hill, depressing the brake pedal will cause
the transmission to downshift to 3rd gear, thus applying engine brake-
ing. Reacceleration for a short time will cause the transmission to up-
shift normally.
NOTE
In some cases, depressing the brake pedal on a downhill grade
does not result in an automatic downshift to 3rd gear. This can
happen when the automatic transmission fluid temperature is
very low, for example, during driving shortly after the vehicle has
been parked for an extended period of time. When the ATF tem-
perature has risen to a certain level, automatic downshift normal-
ly takes place. In the meantime, downshift manually for engine
braking as required.
Also, downshifting when braking downhill will not occur at
speeds above approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).
B 3 (Third)
This position is for using engine braking when going down a hill or for
climbing a grade.
The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to
3rd according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require.
When more acceleration is required in this position, press the acceler-
ator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission
will automatically downshift to 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the
pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7-18
B 2 (Second)
To shift from the “3” to “2” position, push the release button.
This position is for using engine braking when going down a hill or for
climbing a steep grade.
In this position, the transmission holds in the 2nd gear.
Use this position when starting off from a standstill on slippery road
surfaces such as mud or snow. It will ensure greater traction.
B 1 (First)
This position is for driving up or down very steep grades, or driving
through mud or sand, or on slippery surfaces. In this position, the
transmission holds in the 1st gear.
B Maximum speeds
WARNING
When shifting down a gear, ensure that the vehicle is not travel-
ling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the
gear which is about to be selected. Failure to observe this pre-
caution can lead to engine over-revving and this in turn can
result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of engine brakes when the vehicle
is travelling on a slippery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a
consequence, control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk of
an accident increased.
The following tables show the maximum speeds that are possible with
each different gear. The tachometer’s (if so equipped) needle will
enter the red area if these speeds are exceeded.
When shifting down a gear, it is important to confirm that the current
vehicle speed is not in excess of the Maximum Allowable Speed of
the gear which is about to be selected.
Exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speeds will result in over-revving
of the engine. In addition a powerful engine brake will engage and
control of the vehicle may be lost.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7
Starting and operating
7-19
– CONTINUED –
mph (km/h)
Vehicle type
Position
L S
1 34 (54) 34 (54)
2 63 (101) 62 (100)
3 102 (164) 101 (162)
NOTE
D In order to prevent over-revving during acceleration of the
vehicle, the transmission will automatically shift to the next high-
est gear if the Maximum Allowable Speed for the current gear is
exceeded.
D Similarly, in order to prevent over-revving during deceleration
of the vehicle, the transmission will remain in the current gear if
the speed of the vehicle is in excess of the Maximum Allowable
Speed for the gear to which the selector lever has been moved.
B Driving tips
D Always apply the foot or parking brake when the vehicle is
stopped in the “D”, “3”, “2”, “1”, or “R” position.
D Always set the parking brake when parking your vehicle. Do not
hold the vehicle with only the transmission.
D Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on an uphill grade
by using the “D”, “3”, “2” or “1” position. Use the brake instead.
J Shift lock release
If the selector lever does not move from the “P” position with the brake
pedal depressed and the release button pushed in and the ignition
switch in the “ON” position, perform the following steps:
To override the shift lock:
1. Set the parking brake and stop the engine.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7-20
HS0131HS0130
2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag.
3. Open the center console and remove two screws securing the park-
ing brake lever cover.
4. Remove the parking brake lever cover by pulling up on the cover’s
rear end.
5. Raise the rear end of the selector lever cover.
HS0132
Shaft portion of
the screwdriver
6. Draw the shaft portion of the screwdriver from the grip and then insert
the shaft into the hole.
7. Push down on the shaft while pushing the release button and move
the selector lever from the “P” to the “N” position.
8. Remove the shaft from the hole. Depress the brake pedal and start
the engine.
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer immediately to have the
system repaired.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7
Starting and operating
7-21
– CONTINUED –
Rear viscous limited slip differential
(for S models)
CAUTION
D Never start the engine while a tire on one side is jacked up, as
the vehicle may move.
D If one rear tire is spinning in mud, avoid continued spinning at
high speed as this could adversely affect the LSD.
D If a different size rear tire is temporarily used (as in an emer-
gency), it will adversely affect the LSD. Always replace it with a
regular size tire as soon as possible.
The LSD provides optimum distribution of power according to the differ-
ence in revolutions between the right and left rear wheels that may be
caused by certain driving conditions, thereby improving driving stability
on snow-covered, muddy or other slippery roads.
Power steering
CAUTION
Do not hold the steering wheel at the fully locked position left or
right for more than five seconds. This may damage the power
steering pump.
The power steering system operates only when the engine is running.
If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system
fails to function, you can steer but it will take much more effort.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7-22
Braking
J Braking tips
WARNING
Never rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This can
cause dangerous overheating of the brakes and needless wear
on the brake pads and linings.
B When the brakes get wet
When driving in rain, in puddle or after washing the vehicle, the
brakes may get wet. As a result, brake stopping distance will be long-
er. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly
depressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
B Use of engine braking
Remember to make use of engine braking in addition to foot braking.
When descending a grade, if only the foot brake is used, the brakes
may start working improperly because of brake fluid overheating,
caused by overheated brake pads. To help prevent this, shift into a
lower gear.
B Braking when a tire is punctured
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly when a tire is punctured.
This could cause a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road
to a safe place.
J Brake system
B Two separate circuits
Your vehicle has two separate circuit brake systems. Each circuit
works diagonally across the vehicle. If one circuit of the brake system
should fail, the other half of the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will goes down much closer to the floor than usual
and you will need to press it down much harder. And a much longer
distance will be needed to stop the vehicle.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7
Starting and operating
7-23
– CONTINUED –
B Brake booster
The brake booster uses engine manifold vacuum to assist braking
force. Do not turn off the engine while driving because that will turn off
the brake booster, resulting in poor braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even when the brake booster com-
pletely stops functioning. If this happens, however, you will have to
push the pedal much harder than normal and the braking distance
will increase.
J Disc brake pad wear warning indicators
OM-H0163
The disc brake pad wear warning indicators on the disc brakes give a
warning noise when the brake pads are worn.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard from the disc brakes while
braking, immediately have your vehicle checked by your SUBARU deal-
er.
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because
you are driving with an ABS equipped vehicle could easily lead to
a serious accident.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7-24
CAUTION
D The ABS system does not always decrease stopping distance.
You should always maintain a safe following distance from other
vehicles.
D When driving on badly surfaced roads, gravel roads, icy roads,
or over deep newly fallen snow, stopping distances may be long-
er for a vehicle with the ABS system than one without. When driv-
ing under these conditions, therefore, reduce your speed and
leave ample distance from other vehicles.
D When you feel the ABS system operating, you should maintain
constant brake pedal pressure. Do not pump the brake pedal
since doing so may defeat the operation of the ABS system.
The ABS system prevents the lock-up of wheels which may occur during
sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This helps prevent
the loss of steering control and directional stability caused by wheel
lock-up.
When the ABS system is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or
feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal when the ABS
operates.
The ABS system will not operate when the vehicle speed is below
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
B ABS system self-checking
You may feel a slight shock in the brake pedal and hear the operating
sound of ABS from the engine compartment just after the vehicle is
started. This is caused by an automatic functional test of the ABS sys-
tem being carried out and does not indicate any abnormal condition.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7
Starting and operating
7-25
– CONTINUED –
B ABS warning light
HS7004EA
The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position and goes out after about two seconds.
This is an indication that the ABS system is working properly.
CAUTION
If the warning light behaves as follows, the ABS system may not
be working properly. When the warning light is on, the ABS func-
tion shuts down; however, the conventional brake system contin-
ues to operate normally.
D The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position.
D The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position, but it does not go out even when
the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 8mph (12km/h).
D The warning light comes on during driving.
If these occur, have the ABS system repaired at the first available
opportunity by your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as described below, the ABS sys-
tem may be considered normal.
D The warning light comes on right after the engine is started
but goes out immediately, remaining off.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7-26
D The warning light remains on after the engine has been
started, but it goes out when the vehicle speed reaches about 8
mph (12 km/h).
D The warning light comes on during driving, but it goes out
immediately and remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the en-
gine is jump started, the ABS warning light may come on. This is due
to the low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction. When
the battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.
Parking your vehicle
WARNING
D Never leave unattended children or pets in the vehicle. They
could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadver-
tent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, the tem-
perature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough
to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to them.
D Do not park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags, as they may burn easily if they come
near hot engine or exhaust system parts.
D Always stop the engine if you take a nap in the vehicle. If en-
gine exhaust gas enters the passenger compartment, occupants
in the vehicle could die from carbon monoxide (CO) contained in
the exhaust gas.
CAUTION
Never drive while the parking brake is set because this will cause
unnecessary wear on the brake linings. Before starting to drive,
always make sure that the parking brake has been fully released.
To set the parking brake, press the brake pedal firmly and hold it down
while fully pulling up the parking brake lever.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7
Starting and operating
7-27
– CONTINUED –
HS0137
Release button
To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the release
button, then lower the lever while keeping the button pressed.
When the parking brake is set while the engine is running, the parking
brake warning light comes on. After starting the vehicle, be sure that the
warning light has gone out before the vehicle is driven. Refer to the
“Warning and indicator lights” section (Chapter 3).
When parking your vehicle, always set the parking brake firmly and put
the shift lever in the “1” (1st) for an upgrade or “R” (Reverse) for a down-
grade for manual transmission vehicles, or in the “P” (Park) position for
automatic transmission vehicles.
Always set the parking brake firmly when parking your vehicle. Never
rely on the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.
For better parking brake power, depress the brake pedal firmly while set-
ting the parking brake (Drum brake only).
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7-28
HS0140HS0139
When parking on a hill, always turn the steering wheel. When the vehicle
is headed up the hill, the front wheels should be turned away from the
curb. When facing downhill, the front wheels should be turned into the
curb.
Cruise control (if equipped)
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under any of the following condi-
tions. This may cause loss of vehicle control:
D driving up or down a steep grade
D driving on slippery or winding roads
D driving in heavy traffic
Cruise control enables you to maintain a constant vehicle speed without
holding your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is operative when the
vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the main switch is
turned “OFF” when the cruise control is not in use to avoid unintentionally
setting the cruise control.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7
Starting and operating
7-29
– CONTINUED –
B To set cruise control
HG0312HB3002BB
Cruise control lever
1. Push the “CRUISE” main switch.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the vehicle reaches to the de-
sired speed.
3. Push the control lever downward in the “SET, COAST” direction
and release it. Then release the accelerator pedal.
The vehicle will maintain the desired speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily increased while driving with the
cruise control activated. Simply depress the accelerator pedal to ac-
celerate the vehicle. When the accelerator pedal is released, the ve-
hicle will return to and maintain the previous cruising speed.
B To temporarily cancel the cruise control
There are four ways to cancel the cruise control temporarily:
D Depress the brake pedal.
D Pull the control lever in the “CANCEL” direction.
D Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission vehicles only).
D Shift the selector lever into the “N” position (automatic transmis-
sion vehicles only).
If the vehicle speed drops 9 mph (15 km/h) below the preset speed,
the preset speed will automatically cancelled.
To resume the cruise control after it has been temporarily canceled
and with vehicle speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, push the control
lever upward in the “ACCEL, RESUME” direction to return to the origi-
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
7-30
nal cruising speed automatically.
B To turn off the cruise control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
D Push the main switch again.
D Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” position (but only when the
vehicle is completely stopped).
B To change the cruising speed
n To increase the speed
1. Push the control lever upward in the “ACCEL, RESUME” direction
and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed.
The control lever can be used for increasing the cruising speed slight-
ly. Pressing the control lever upward in the “ACCEL, RESUME” direc-
tion increases the vehicle speed about 2 mph (3.2 km/h). Press the
control lever repeatedly until the desired speed is reached.
OR
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle to the de-
sired speed.
2. Push the control lever downward in the “SET, COAST” direction
once. Now the desired speed is set and the vehicle will keep running
at that speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.
n To decrease the speed
1. Push the control lever downward in the “SET, COAST” direction
and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed.
The control lever can be used for decreasing the cruising speed
slightly. Pressing the control lever downward in the “SET, COAST”
direction decreases the vehicle speed about 2 mph (3.2 km/h). Press
the control lever repeatedly until the desired speed is reached.
OR
1. Depress the brake pedal to release cruise control temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the desired speed, press the control
lever downward in the “SET, COAST” direction once. Now the desired
speed is set and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving –
the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) 8-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel economy hints 8-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) 8-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalytic converter 8-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic inspections 8-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving in foreign countries 8-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving tips for AWD vehicles 8-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off road driving 8-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving 8-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow tires 8-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire chains 8-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rocking the vehicle 8-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrosion protection 8-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading your vehicle 8-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle capacity weight 8-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle
Weight Rating) 8-17
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped) 8-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing 8-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8-2
New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km)
The performance and long life of your vehicle are dependent on how you
handle and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instructions
during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km):
D Do not race the engine.
B Break-in engine speed limit
Never exceed 4,000 rpm engine speed except for brief acceleration
in an emergency.
D Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed for a long
time, either fast or slow.
D Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, except in an emer-
gency.
D Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency.
The same break-in procedures should be applied to a newly-installed
or overhauled engine or when brake pads or brake linings are
replaced with new ones.
Fuel economy hints
The following suggestions will help to save your fuel.
D Select the proper gear position for the speed and road conditions.
D Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Always accelerate gently
until you reach the desired speed. Then try to maintain that speed for as
long as possible.
D Do not pump the accelerator and avoid racing the engine.
D Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
D Keep the engine properly tuned.
D Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure shown on the tire plac-
ard, which is located under the door latch on the driver’s side. Low pres-
sure will increase tire wear and fuel consumption.
D Use the air conditioner only when necessary.
D Keep the front and rear wheels in proper alignment.
D Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or cargo.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8
Starting and operating
8-3
– CONTINUED –
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)
WARNING
D Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is danger-
ous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
D Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to pre-
vent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
D Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage,
except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.
D Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventila-
tion fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.
D Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow,
leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system
always works properly.
D If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as pos-
sible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all
windows fully open.
D Keep the trunk lid or rear gate closed while driving to prevent
exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction of the metals used in the
manufacture of the exhaust system, you may hear a crackling sound
coming from the exhaust system for a short time after the engine
has been shut off. This sound is normal.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8-4
Catalytic converter
WARNING
D Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or park the vehicle anywhere
near flammable materials (e.g. grass, paper, rags or leaves),
because the catalytic converter operates at very high tempera-
tures.
D Keep everyone and flammable materials away from the
exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very
hot.
HB3003BA
The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust system. It serves as a
catalyst to reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases, thus providing
cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:
D Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small amount of leaded fuel will dam-
age the catalytic converter.
D Never start the engine by pushing or pulling the vehicle.
D Avoid racing the engine.
D Never turn off the ignition switch while the vehicle is moving.
D Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel the engine running rough (mis-
firing, backfiring or incomplete combustion), have your vehicle checked
and repaired by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
D Do not apply undercoating or rust prevention treatment to the heat
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8
Starting and operating
8-5
– CONTINUED –
shield of catalytic converter and the exhaust system
Periodic inspections
To keep your vehicle in the best condition at all times, always have the
recommended maintenance services listed in the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet” performed at the specified
time or mileage intervals.
Driving in foreign countries
When planning to use your vehicle in another country:
D Confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (Refer to “Fuel requirement”
section in chapter 7.)
D Comply with all regulations and requirements of each country.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8-6
Driving tips for AWD vehicles
WARNING
D Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road
and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar condi-
tions.
D Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence
because you are driving an all wheel drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
HS0113
All wheel drive distributes the engine power to all four wheels. AWD
vehicles provide better traction when driving on slippery, wet or snow-
covered roads and when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By shifting
power between the front and rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also pro-
vide added traction during acceleration and added engine braking force
during deceleration.
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle may handle differently than an
ordinary two wheel drive vehicle and it contains some features unique to
AWD. For safety purposes as well as to avoid damaging the AWD sys-
tem, you should keep the following tips in mind:
D An AWD vehicle is better able to climb steeper roads under snowy or
slippery conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. There is little differ-
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8
Starting and operating
8-7
– CONTINUED –
ence in handling, however, during extremely sharp turns or sudden brak-
ing. Therefore, when driving down a slope or turning corners, be sure to
reduce your speed and maintain an ample distance from other vehicles.
D When replacing a tire, make sure you use only the same size, circum-
ference, construction, brand, and load range as the original tires listed on
the tire placard. Using other sizes, circumference or construction may
result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and
may affect ride, handling, braking, speedometer/odometer calibration, and
clearance between the body and tires. It also may be dangerous and lead
to loss of vehicle control.
D Always check the cold tire pressure before starting to drive. The rec-
ommended tire pressure is provided on the tire placard, which is located
under the door latch on the driver’s side.
D Tire chains should always be placed on the front wheels only.
D There are some precautions that you must observe when towing your
vehicle. For detail information, see the “Towing” section in this chapter.
Off road driving
WARNING
D Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road
and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar condi-
tions.
D Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence
because you are driving an all wheel drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
Because of the AWD feature and higher ground clearance, your Subaru
can be driven on ordinary roads or off-road. But please keep in mind that
an AWD Subaru is a passenger car and is neither a conventional off-road
vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take your Subaru off-road, cer-
tain common sense precautions such as the following should be taken:
D Make certain that you and all of your passengers are wearing seat
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8-8
belts.
D Carry some emergency equipment, such as a towing rope or chain, a
shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit and portable phone or citizens band
radio.
D Drive carefully. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous
areas or over rough terrain.
D Slow down and employ extra caution at all times. When driving off-
road, you will not have the benefit of marked traffic lanes, banked
curves, traffic signs and the like.
D Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead, drive either straight up or
straight down the slopes. A vehicle can much more easily tip over side-
ways than it can end over end. Avoid driving straight up or down slopes
that are too steep.
D Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, especially at higher speeds.
D Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel. A bad bump
could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive with your fin-
gers and thumbs on the outside of the rim.
D If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first
check the depth of the water and the bottom of the stream bed for firm-
ness and ensure that the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly and com-
pletely through the stream. The water should be shallow enough that it
does not reach the vehicle’s undercarriage. Water entering the engine air
intake or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts may
damage your vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never attempt to drive
through rushing water; regardless of its depth, it can wash away the
ground from under your tires, resulting in possible loss of traction and
even vehicle rollover.
D Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving
in sand, mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and stepping on the
brake pedal. Repeat that process several times to dry out the brake
discs and brake pads.
D Do not drive or park over or near flammable materials such as dry
grass or fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The exhaust system is
very hot while engine is running and right after the engine stops. This
could create a fire hazard.
D After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8
Starting and operating
8-9
– CONTINUED –
that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand, etc. adhering to
or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the under-
body. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to
the underbody, a mechanical breakdown or fire could occur.
D Secure all cargo carried inside the vehicle and make certain that it is
not piled higher than the seatbacks. During sudden stops or jolts, unse-
cured cargo could be thrown around in the vehicle and cause injury. Do
not pile heavy loads on the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s center of
gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
D If you must rock the vehicle to free it from sand or mud, depress the
accelerator pedal slightly and move the selector lever back and forth
between “D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best
possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the
vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better trac-
tion by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for
MT and AT).
D Never equip your vehicle with tires larger than those specified in this
manual.
D Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle under hard-driving conditions such
as rough roads or off roads will necessitate more frequent replacement of
engine oil, brake fluid and transmission oil than that specified in the main-
tenance schedule described in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Remember that damage done to your Subaru while operating it off-road
and not using common sense precautions such as those listed above is
not eligible for warranty coverage.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8-10
Winter driving
HS0141
B Operation during cold weather
Carry some emergency equipment, such as tire chains, a window
scraper, a bag of sand, flares, a small shovel, and jumper cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold temperatures reduce battery
capacity. The battery must be in good condition to provide enough
power for cold winter starts.
Use an engine oil of proper grade and viscosity for cold weather.
Heavy summer oil will cause harder starting.
Keep the door locks from freezing by squirting them with deicer or
glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage or separate the rubber
weather strips around the door. If the door is frozen, use hot water to
melt the ice, and afterwards thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an antifreeze solution. Do
not use engine antifreeze or other substitutes because they may dam-
age the paint of the vehicle.
n Before driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle, remove any snow or ice from your shoes
because that could make the pedals slippery and dangerous.
While warming up the vehicle before driving, check that the accelera-
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8
Starting and operating
8-11
– CONTINUED –
tor pedal, brake pedal, and all other controls operate smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow that has accumulated under the fenders to
avoid making steering difficult. During severe winter driving, stop
when and where it is safe to do so and check under the fenders peri-
odically.
n During cold weather below –4°F (–20°C)
If the engine is difficult to start using the normal method (without
depressing the accelerator pedal), turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position while slightly depressing the accelerator pedal.
n Parking in cold weather
WARNING
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle.
Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your
vehicle if you park the vehicle in snow with the engine running.
Do not use the parking brake when parking for long periods in cold
weather since it could freeze in that position. Instead, observe the fol-
lowing:
1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for manual transmission vehicles,
and in “P” for automatic transmission vehicles.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving.
When the vehicle is parked in snow or when it snows, raise the wiper
blades off the glass to prevent damage to them.
When the vehicle has been left parked after use on roads heavily cov-
ered with snow, or has been left parked during a snowstorm, icing
may develop on the brake system, which could cause poor braking
action. Check for snow or ice buildup on the suspension, disc brakes
and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.
If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, being careful not to damage
the disc brakes and brake hoses and ABS harness.
n Refueling in cold weather
To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel system and the risk
of its freezing, use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel tank is recom-
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8-12
mended during cold weather.
Use only additives that are specifically designed for this purpose.
When an antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts longer if the tank is
refilled whenever the fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used for an extended period, it is
best to have the fuel tank filled to capacity.
B Driving on snowy and icy roads
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads such as snowy or
icy roads. This may cause loss of vehicle control.
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid sudden braking, abrupt accel-
eration, high-speed driving, and sharp turning when driving on snowy
or icy roads.
Always maintain ample distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead of you to avoid the need for sudden braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the engine brake effectively to con-
trol the vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear when necessary.)
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behavior can cause the wheel to
lock, possibly leading to loss of vehicle control.
Avoid locking the front wheels because that can lead to a loss of
steering control. When braking with a vehicle not equipped with an
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), press the brake pedal repeatedly at
short intervals to prevent the wheels from locking. Then apply the
brakes softly to bring the vehicle to a stop.
An ABS enhances your vehicle’s braking performance on snowy and
icy roads. Refer to the “ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)” in chapter 7
for information on braking on slippery surfaces in ABS equipped
vehicle.
n Wiper operation when snowing
Before driving in cold weather, make sure the wiper blades are not
frozen to the windshield or rear window. If the wiper blades are frozen
to the windshield or rear window, use the defroster with the airflow
control dial in the “
” position and the temperature control lever
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8
Starting and operating
8-13
– CONTINUED –
turned fully to the right until the wiper blades are completely thawed
out. To thaw out the rear wiper blade, use the rear window defogger.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts to stick on the surface of
the windshield despite wiper operation, use the defroster with the air-
flow control dial in “
” and the temperature control dial turned fully
to the right. After the windshield gets warmed enough to melt the fro-
zen snow on it, wash it away using the windshield washer.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the wiper from working effec-
tively. If snow is stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to a safe
place, then remove it. If you stop the car at road side, use the hazard
warning flasher to alert other drivers.
We recommend use of non-freezing type wiper blades (winter blades)
during the seasons you could have snow and sub-zero temperature.
Blades of this type give superior wiping performance in snowy condi-
tions. Be sure to use blades that are suitable for your vehicle.
J Snow tires
WARNING
D When replacing original tires with winter (snow) tires, make
sure you use only the same size, construction and load range as
the original tires listed on the tire placard. Using other sizes and
construction may affect speedometer/odometer calibration and
clearance between the body and tires. It also may be dangerous
and lead to loss of vehicle control.
D You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, cir-
cumferences, construction, brand, and load range. Mixing other
sizes, circumferences or constructions may result in severe me-
chanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and may affect
ride, handling, braking and speedometer/odometer calibration. It
also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control.
D Do not use a combination of radial, belted bias or bias tires
since it may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8-14
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season tires” which are designed to
provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking perfor-
mance in year-round driving. In winter, it may be possible to enhance
performance through use of tires designed specifically for winter driving
conditions.
If you choose to install winter tires on your vehicle, be sure to use the
correct tire size and type. You must install four winter tires that are of the
same size, construction, brand and load range and you should never
mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may result in dangerous
handling characteristics. When you choose a tire, make sure that there is
enough clearance between the tire and vehicle body.
Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of the type of tires on
your vehicle.
J Tire chains
Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may require the use of tire chains,
in which case put the chains on the front wheels only. Use only SAE
class S type chains that are of the correct size for your tires so as not to
damage the vehicle body or suspension.
When driving with tire chains, drive at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h).
When a temporary spare tire is on a front wheel, replace the temporary
spare tire with the rear tire on the same side of the vehicle, and then fit
chains on the front tires.
Always use the utmost care when driving with tire chains — overconfi-
dence because you are driving with tire chains could easily lead to a
serious accident.
J Rocking the vehicle
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, depress the
accelerator pedal slightly and move the selector lever back and forth
between “D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best pos-
sible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better trac-
tion by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8
Starting and operating
8-15
– CONTINUED –
MT and AT).
Refer to the “Automatic transmission” section in chapter 7 for information
on holding the transmission in 2nd position.
J Corrosion protection
Refer to the “Corrosion protection” section (chapter 10).
Loading your vehicle
WARNING
D Never allow passengers to ride on the folded rear seatback or
in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury.
D Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers
in the event of a sudden stop or accident. Keep luggage or cargo
low, as close to the floor as possible.
D When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it when-
ever you can to prevent it from being thrown around inside the
vehicle in sudden stop, sharp turn or accident.
D Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. These loads raise the
vehicle’s center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
D Secure skis and other lengthy items properly to prevent them
from shooting forward and causing serious injury during a sud-
den stop.
D Never exceed the maximum load limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
D Do not place anything on the extended luggage cover. Such
items could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or a
collision. This could cause serious injury.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8-16
CAUTION
Do not carry spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous items inside the vehicle.
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded cargo.
J Vehicle capacity weight
HS0251HS0250
Tire information label
The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by avail-
able cargo space. The maximum load you can carry in your vehicle is
shown as the Vehicle Capacity Weight on the tire information label
attached to the driver’s side door jamb. It includes the total weight of
driver and all passengers and their belongings, any optional equipment
such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load
of a trailer.
The tire information label also shows recommended tire inflation pressure
under full loading and trailer towing conditions. Adjust tire inflation pres-
sures according to the loading conditions. For the tire inflation pressures,
refer to the “Tires and wheel” section in Chapter 11.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8
Starting and operating
8-17
– CONTINUED –
J GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and
Gross Axle Weight Rating)
HS0143
Certification plate
The certification plate attached to the driver’s side door jamb shows
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must never exceed the GVWR. GVW is
the combined total of weight of the vehicle, fuel, driver, all passengers,
luggage, any optional equipment and trailer tongue load. Therefore, the
GVW changes depending on the situation. The GVWR equals Curb
Weight (actual weight of your vehicle – including standard equipment,
fluids, emergency tools and spare tire assembly) plus the vehicle capac-
ity weight.
In addition, the total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never
exceed the GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocat-
ing luggage inside the vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than the vehicle capacity
weight, either front or rear GAW may exceed the GAWR, depending on
the distribution of the luggage.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you should confirm that GVW and
front and rear GAWs are within the GVWR and GAWR by putting your
vehicle on a vehicle scale, found at a commercial weighing station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower load range than the originals
because they may lower the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8-18
tires with a higher load range than the originals do not increase the
GVWR and GAWR limitations.
J Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped)
CAUTION
D For cargo carrying purposes, the roof rail must be used
together with a roof cross bar kit. The roof rail must never be
used alone to carry cargo. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint
or a dangerous road hazard due to loss of cargo could result.
D When using the roof cross bar kit, make sure that the total
weight of the crossbars, carrying attachment and cargo does not
exceed the maximum load limit. Overloading may cause damage
to the vehicle and create a safety hazard.
HS1005BB
The roof rail is not designed to carry cargo by itself.
Cargo can be carried on the roof after securing the roof cross bar kit to
the roof rail. When installing the roof cross bar kit on the roof rail, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions. When you carry cargo on the roof using
the roof cross bar kit, never exceed maximum load limit explained below.
You should also be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rat-
ing (GAWR). See the “Loading your vehicle” section in this chapter for
information on loading cargo into or onto your vehicle.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8
Starting and operating
8-19
– CONTINUED –
B When luggage is put on the slats (Vehicles with roof slats only)
When putting any luggage on the slats, make sure the total weight of
the luggage on the slats of the roof cross bar kit does not exceed 100
lb. (45 kg). Overloading may cause damage to the roof and create a
safety hazard. Place the heaviest load at the bottom, nearest the roof,
and evenly distribute the luggage. Always secure the luggage with
straps, ropes or nets.
B Installing carrying attachments on the cross bars
When installing any carrying attachment such as a bike carrier, ski
carrier, kayak carrier, etc. on the cross bars, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions and make sure that the attachment is securely fixed to the
cross bars. Use only attachments designed specifically for the cross-
bars. A set of the cross bars is designed to carry loads (cargo and
attachment) of not more than 150 lb. (68 kg). Before operating the
vehicle, make sure that the cargo is properly secured on the attach-
ment.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of gravity is altered with the
weight of the load on the roof, thus affecting driving characteris-
tics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and abrupt
stops. Crosswind effects will be increased.
B Removal and installation of the crossbars
CAUTION
Do not carry cargo on the roof when the crossbars are removed.
Luggage on the roof will be thrown forward or backward in sud-
den stops or rapid accelerations, resulting in a dangerous road
hazard.
The crossbars can be removed when you do not use the roof to carry
cargo.
n To remove the crossbar
1. Loosen without removing the T-30 torxR head screw from each
crossbar end support and clamp.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8-20
2. Move the end support and inner clamp to unhook under the bot-
tom of the roof rail on both sides.
3. Carefully raise the crossbar from roof rails.
NOTE
It may be necessary to move the Front crossbar rearward, near
the center of the roof rail for easier removal. Use care not to
cross-thread the screw in the insert if it has been removed.
n To install the crossbar
Front crossbar:
Front crossbar has the Load Label on left-hand side.
HS1006BB
1. Before placing the crossbar on the roof rails, make sure that the
T-30 torxR head screw is fully loosened from each end support.
2. Slide the inner clamp on the end support outward as far as pos-
sible.
3. With the front direction arrow label on the top right side of the
crossbar pointing toward the front of the vehicle, carefully place the
crossbar across the top of the vehicle so that the crossbar end sup-
ports rest on the top of the roof rails approximately 6 inches (150 mm)
rearward in the front radius of the roof rail.
4. Move the end support and inner clamp to hook under the bottom
of the roof rail on both sides and loosely assemble the T-30 torxR
head screw with the tool provided into the threaded insert in the inner
clamp on each end of the crossbar.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8
Starting and operating
8-21
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
It may be necessary to start the inner clamp and end support at
the center of the roof rail for easier installation, then move the
crossbar forward. Use care not to cross-thread the screw in the
insert if it has been removed.
5. Adjust the alignment of the crossbar on the roof rails and tighten to
30 to 35 inch lbs. (3.4 to 4.0 N-m, 0.35 to 0.41 kg-m) with the torxR
tool provided. If available, you may use a T-30 torxR bit and torque
wrench to tighten the crossbar torxR head screw.
Rear crossbar:
HS1007BB
Install the rear crossbar in the same manner as the front crossbar.
NOTE
The rear crossbar should be positioned 6 inches (150 mm) for-
ward of the rear radius in the roof rail.
NOTE
Before each use of the roof crossbar, make sure the four T-30 cross-
bar clamp screws have been checked, and re-tightened, if neces-
sary, to 35 in. lbs. (4.0 N-m, 0.41 kg-m), as outlined in Step #5 above.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8-22
Trailer towing
Your car is designed and intended to be used primarily as a passenger-
carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your car’s
engine, drivetrain, brakes, tires and suspension and has an adverse
effect on fuel economy.
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety and satisfaction depend
upon proper use of correct equipment and cautious operation of your
vehicle. Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer to assist you in pur-
chasing a hitch and other necessary towing equipment appropriate for
your vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the instructions on correct
installation and use provided by the trailer and other towing equipment
manufacturers.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or vehicle damage that
result from trailer towing equipment, or from any errors or omissions in
the instructions accompanying such equipment or for your failure to fol-
low the proper instructions.
B Warranties and maintenance
SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle damage or malfunction
caused by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow a trailer, more
frequent maintenance will be required due to the additional load.
(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under severe driving conditions” in
the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.)
Under no circumstances should a trailer be towed with a new vehicle
or a vehicle with any new powertrain component (engine, transmis-
sion, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600
km) of driving.
B Maximum load limits
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum load limits explained below. Exceed-
ing the maximum load limits could cause personal injury and/or
vehicle damage.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8
Starting and operating
8-23
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
D Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and
its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) total weight.
D Before towing a trailer, check the trailer total weight, GVW,
GAWs and tongue load. Make sure the load and its distribution in
your vehicle and trailer are acceptable.
n Total trailer weight
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo load) must never
exceed the maximum weight shown below.
Model
Conditions Maximum total
trailer weight
MT models When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,000 lbs (906 kg)
AT models When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,000 lbs (906 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill
grade continuously for over 5 miles (8
km) with an outside temperature of
104°F (40°C) or above.
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
OM-H2781
Total trailer weight
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8-24
n Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must never exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the combined total of the weight of the
vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch, trailer tongue load
and any other optional equipment installed on your vehicle. Therefore,
the GVW changes depending on the situation. Determine the GVW
each time before going on a trip by putting your vehicle and trailer on
a vehicle scale.
GVWR is shown on the certification plate located on the driver’s door
jamb of your vehicle.
HS0143
Gross Vehicle Weight Certification plate
HS0142
n Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR)
The total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating passengers and luggage inside the vehicle.
The front and rear GAWR are also shown on the certification plate.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8
Starting and operating
8-25
– CONTINUED –
HS0143
Gross Axle Weight Certification plate
HS0144
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to confirm that the total weight
and weight distribution are within safe driving limits, you should have
your vehicle and trailer weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight
distribution while driving.
n Tongue load
WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more weight in the back of trailer’s
axle than in the front, the load is taken off the rear axle of the tow-
ing vehicle. This may cause the rear wheels to skid, especially
during braking or when vehicle speed is reduced during corner-
ing, resulting in over-steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8 to 11 percent of the total
trailer weight and does not exceed the maximum value of 200 lbs (90
kg).
The tongue load can be weighed with a bathroom scale as shown in
the illustration below. When weighing the tongue load, be sure to posi-
tion the towing coupler at the height at which it would be during
actual towing, using a jack as shown.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8-26
HS0145
Tongue load
OM-H2785
Bathroom scale
Jack
The tongue load can be adjusted by proper distribution of the load in
the trailer. Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than in
the front; approximately 60 percent of the trailer load should be in the
front and approximately 40 percent in the rear. Also, distribute the
load as evenly as possible on both the left and right sides.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight
distribution while driving.
OM-H2787
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8
Starting and operating
8-27
– CONTINUED –
B Trailer hitches
WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body of your vehicle to install a
commercial trailer hitch. If you do, dangerous exhaust gas, water
or mud may enter the passenger compartment through the drilled
hole. Exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and
odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. Also,
drilling the frame or under-body of your vehicle could cause dete-
rioration of strength of your vehicle and cause corrosion around
the drilled hole.
CAUTION
D Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, or
other systems when installing a hitch or other trailer towing
equipment.
D Do not use axle-mounted hitches as they can cause damage to
the axle housing, wheel bearings, wheels or tires.
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.
The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer hitch is recommended. A genu-
ine SUBARU hitch is available from your SUBARU dealer.
If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoidable, be sure the hitch is
suited to your vehicle and trailer. Consult with a professional hitch
supplier to assist you in choosing an appropriate hitch for your
vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch manufacturer’s instructions for
installation and use.
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the rear bumper. The bumper is
not designed to handle that type of load.
For all types of hitches, regularly check that the hitch mounting bolts
and nuts are tight.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8-28
B Connecting a trailer
n Trailer brakes
WARNING
D Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and
its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) total weight.
D Do not directly connect your trailer’s hydraulic brake system
to the hydraulic brake system in your vehicle. Direct connection
would cause the vehicle’s brake performance to deteriorate and
could lead to an accident.
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight)
exceeds 1,000 lbs (453 kg), the trailer is required to be equipped with
its own brake system. Electric brakes or surge brakes are recom-
mended, and must be installed properly. Check that your trailer’s
brakes conform with Federal, state/province and/or other applicable
regulations. Your SUBARU’s brake system is not designed to be
tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic brake system. Please ask your
SUBARU dealer and professional trailer supplier for more information
about the trailer’s brake system.
n Trailer safety chain
WARNING
Always use safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer.
Towing trailer without safety chains could create a traffic safety
hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling dam-
age or hitch ball damage.
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch ball should break or
become disconnected, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic
safety hazard.
For safety, always connect the towing vehicle and trailer with trailer
safety chains. Pass the chains crossing each other under the trailer
tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping onto the ground in case
the trailer tongue should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow suffi-
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8
Starting and operating
8-29
– CONTINUED –
cient slack in the chains taking tight-turn situations into account; how-
ever, be careful not to let them drag on the ground.
For more information about the safety chain connection, refer to the
instructions for your hitch and trailer.
n Side mirrors
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, check that the standard side
mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without significant blind
spots. If significant blind spots occur with the vehicle’s standard side
mirrors, use towing mirrors that conform with Federal, state/province
and/or other applicable regulations.
HS0146
n Trailer lights
CAUTION
Direct splicing or other improper connection of trailer lights may
damage your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction
of your vehicle’s lighting system.
Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s electrical system requires
modifications to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to increase its capacity
and accommodate wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights are
connected properly, please consult your SUBARU dealer. Check for
proper operation of the turn signals and the brake lights and parking
lights each time you hitch up.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8-30
n Tires
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle are properly inflated to the
pressure under towing conditions as shown on the tire placard
located on the left center pillar of your vehicle. Trailer tire condition,
size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accor-
dance with the trailer manufacturer’s specifications.
B Trailer towing tips
CAUTION
D Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when towing a trailer in hilly
country on hot days.
D When towing a trailer, steering, stability, stopping distance and
braking performance will be different from normal operation. For
safety’s sake, you should employ extra caution when towing a
trailer and you should never speed. You should also keep the fol-
lowing tips in mind:
n Before starting out on a trip
D Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-hitch mounting are in good
condition. If any problems are apparent, do not tow the trailer.
D Check that the vehicle sits horizontally with the trailer attached. If
the vehicle is tipped sharply up at the front and down at the rear,
check the total trailer weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load again,
then confirm that the load and its distribution are acceptable.
D Check that the tire pressures are correct.
D Check that the vehicle and trailer are connected properly. Confirm that
– the trailer tongue is connected properly to the hitch ball.
– the trailer lights connector is connected properly and trailer’s
brake lights illuminate when the vehicle’s brake pedal is pressed,
and that the trailer’s turn signal lights flash when the vehicle’s turn
signal lever is operated.
– the safety chains are connected properly.
– all cargo in the trailer is secured safety in position.
– the side mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without a
significant blind spot.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8
Starting and operating
8-31
– CONTINUED –
D Sufficient time should be taken to learn the “feel” of the vehicle/
trailer combination before starting out on a trip. In an area free of traf-
fic, practice turning, stopping and backing up.
n Driving with a trailer
D You should allow for considerably more stopping distance when
towing a trailer. Avoid sudden braking because it may result in skid-
ding or jackknifing and loss of control.
D Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accelerations. If your vehicle has a
manual transmission, always start out in first gear and release the
clutch at moderate engine RPM.
D Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and rapid lane changes.
D Slow down before turning. Make a longer than normal turning
radius because the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle
wheels to the inside of the turn. In a tight turn, the trailer could hit your
vehicle.
D Crosswinds will adversely affect the handling of your vehicle and
trailer, causing sway. Crosswinds can be due to weather conditions or
the passing of large trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the
steering wheel and slow down immediately but gradually.
D When passing other vehicles, considerable distance is required
because of the added weight and length caused by attaching the
trailer to your vehicle.
D When backing up with a trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.
When turning back, grip the bottom of the steering wheel with one
hand and turn it to the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right for a
right turn.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8-32
OM-H2791
D If the ABS warning light illuminates while the vehicle is in motion,
stop towing the trailer and have repairs performed immediately by the
nearest SUBARU dealer.
n Driving on grades
D Before going down a steep hill, slow down and shift into low gear
in order to utilize the engine braking effect and prevent overheating of
your vehicle’s brakes. Do not make sudden downshifts.
D When driving uphill in hot weather, the air conditioner may turn off
automatically to protect the engine from overheating.
D When driving uphill in hot weather, pay attention to the water tem-
perature gauge needle (for all vehicles) and ATF OIL TEMP warning
light (for AT vehicles) since the engine and transmission are relatively
prone to overheating under these conditions. If the water temperature
gauge needle approaches the OVERHEAT zone or the ATF OIL TEMP
warning light illuminates, immediately switch off the air conditioner
and stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place. Refer to “Engine over-
heat” section (chapter 9), and “Warning and indicator lights” section
(chapter 3) in the owner’s manual.
D If your vehicle has a automatic transmission, avoid using the accel-
erator pedal to stay stationary on an uphill slope instead of using the
parking brake or foot brake. That may cause the transmission fluid to
overheat. Also, if your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmis-
sion, avoid driving with the gear selector lever in “D” when towing a
heavy trailer to prevent fluid overheating.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
8
Starting and operating
8-33
– CONTINUED –
n Parking on a grade
Always block the wheels under both vehicle and trailer when parking.
Apply the parking brake firmly. You should not park on a hill or slope.
But if parking on a hill or slope cannot be avoided, you should take
the following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and
trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release the regular brakes
slowly until the blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then apply the parking brake; slowly
release the regular brakes.
5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual transmission) or “P” (auto-
matic transmission) and shut off the engine.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
9
In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher 9-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat tires 9-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump starting 9-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine overheating 9-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing 9-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moonroof – if the moonroof cannot be closed 9-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance tools 9-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire changing tools 9-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
9-2
Hazard warning flasher
HS0053
The hazard warning flasher should be used in day or night to warn other
drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to safely pull off the road if a prob-
lem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be activated regardless of the ignition
switch position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the hazard warning flasher
switch. Turn it off by pushing the switch again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work.
Flat tires
WARNING
D Do not jack up the vehicle on an incline or a loose road sur-
face. The jack can come out of the jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in a severe accident.
D Use only the jack provided with your vehicle. The jack sup-
plied with the vehicle is designed only for changing a tire. Never
get under the vehicle while supporting the vehicle with this jack.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
9
In case of emergency
9-3
– CONTINUED –
D Always turn the engine off before raising the flat tire off the
ground using the jack. Never swing or push the vehicle sup-
ported with the jack. The jack can come out of the jacking point
due to a jolt and this can result in a severe accident.
D Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts when the
spare tire is installed. This could cause the nuts to become loose
and lead to an accident.
D Never place a tire or tire changing tools in the passenger
compartment after changing wheels. In a sudden stop or colli-
sions, loose equipment could strike occupants and cause injury.
Store the tire and all tools in the proper place.
If you have a flat tire while driving, never brake suddenly; keep driving
straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Set the parking brake securely and shift a manual transmission ve-
hicle in reverse or an automatic transmission vehicle in the “P” (Park)
position.
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and have everyone get out of the
vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire diagonally opposite
the flat tire.
HS0148
Jacking position
Wheel blocks
5. Take out the spare tire, jack, and wheel nut wrench.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
9-4
HSF010BC
HS0159
Jack
Jack
handle
Spare tire
The spare tire is stored under the floor of the cargo area. To remove the
spare tire, first open the spare tire cover and remove the storage tray, turn
the attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take the spare tire out.
HS0160HS0118
The jack is stored under the left side of the cargo floor.
To take out the jack:
First raise the cargo anchorage eyelet on the rear-left side of the cargo
area and pull the tab to open the lid, turn the jack screw counterclock-
wise to loosen it, then remove the jack.
The jack handle is stored under the lid.
6. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel nut wrench but do not remove
the nuts.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
9
In case of emergency
9-5
– CONTINUED –
HS0149
7. Place the jack under the side sill at the front or rear jack-up point clos-
est to the flat tire.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack head engages firmly into the
jack-up point.
HS0150
8. Insert the jack handle into the jackscrew, and turn the handle clock-
wise until the tire clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle higher than
necessary.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
9-6
HS0151
9. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat tire.
10. Before putting the spare tire on, clean the mounting surface of the
wheel and hub with a cloth.
HG0104OM-H0172
11. Put on the spare tire. Replace the wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
12. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.
13. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely tighten the wheel nuts to the
specified torque, following the tightening order in the illustration.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
9
In case of emergency
9-7
– CONTINUED –
HS0152
1
4
2
5
3
The torque for tightening the nuts is 58 to 72 ft-lb (78 to 98 N-m, 8 to 10
kg-m). This torque is equivalent to applying about 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50
kg) at the top of the wheel nut wrench. Never use your foot on the wheel
nut wrench or a pipe extension on the wrench because you may exceed
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest
automotive service facility.
14. Store the flat tire in the spare tire compartment.
HS0153
Flat tire
Attaching bolt
Spacer
Also store the jack and wheel nut wrench in their storage locations.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
9-8
Jump starting
WARNING
D Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. Do not let it come in contact
with the eyes, skin, clothing or the vehicle.
If battery fluid gets on you, thoroughly flush the exposed area
with water immediately. Get medical help if the fluid has entered
your eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water, and obtain immediate medical
help.
Keep everyone including children away from the battery.
D The gas generated by a battery explodes if a flame or spark is
brought near it. Do not smoke or light a match while jump start-
ing.
D Never attempt jump starting if the discharged battery is frozen.
It could cause the battery to burst or explode.
D Whenever working on or around a battery, always wear suit-
able eye protectors, and remove metal objects such as rings,
bands or other metal jewelry.
D Be sure the jumper cables and clamps on them do not have
loose or missing insulation.
Do not jump start unless cables in suitable condition are avail-
able.
D A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any
other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is
advisable.
When your vehicle does not start due to a run down (discharged) bat-
tery, the vehicle may be jump started by connecting your battery to
another battery (called the booster battery) with jumper cables.
Jump starting is dangerous if it done incorrectly. If you are unsure about
the proper procedure for jump starting, consult a competent mechanic.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
9
In case of emergency
9-9
– CONTINUED –
B How to jump start
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 volts and the negative terminal
is grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not let the two ve-
hicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in the sequence illustrated.
HS0147
1
4
2
3
Booster battery
Engine lifting bracket
1 Connect one jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal on the
discharged battery.
2 Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the booster battery.
3 Connect one end of the other cable to the negative (–) terminal
of the booster battery.
4 Connect the other end of the cable to the engine lifting bracket.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
9-10
Make sure that the cables are not near any moving parts and that
the cable clamps are not in contact with any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and run it at
moderate speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle that has the dis-
charged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect the cables in exactly the re-
verse order.
Engine overheating
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has
been shut off and has fully cooled down. When the engine is hot,
the coolant is under pressure. Removing the cap while the engine
is still hot could release a spray of boiling hot coolant, which
could burn you very seriously.
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the road and stop the vehicle in a
safe place.
B If steam is coming from the engine compartment
Turn the engine off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it
cools down.
B If no steam is coming from the engine compartment
1. Keep the engine running at idling speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine compartment.
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not turning, im-
mediately turn the engine off and contact your authorized dealer for
repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature has dropped, turn off the en-
gine.
If the temperature gauge stays at the overheated zone, turn the en-
gine off.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down, check the coolant level in
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
9
In case of emergency
9-11
– CONTINUED –
the reserve tank.
If the coolant level is below the “MIN” mark, add coolant up to the
“MAX” mark.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, add coolant to the reserve
tank. Then remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot radiator, first wrap a thick
cloth around the radiator cap, then turn the cap counterclockwise
slowly without pressing down until it stops. Release the pressure from
the radiator. After the pressure has been fully released, remove the
cap by pressing down and turning it.
Towing
WARNING
Never tow AWD vehicles (both AT and MT) with the front wheels
raised off the ground while the rear wheels are on the ground, or
with the rear wheels raised off the ground while the front wheels
are on the ground. This will cause the vehicle to spin away due to
the operation or deterioration of the center differential.
HS0374
If towing is necessary, it is best done by your SUBARU dealer or a com-
mercial towing service. Observe the following procedures for safety.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
9-12
B Towing and tie-down hooks
CAUTION
D Never use the tie-down hook closest to the muffler under the
vehicle for towing purposes.
D Do not apply excessive lateral load to the towing hooks.
HS9000BBHSF015CB
Towing and tie-down hooks
Towing hook
HS0166
Never use tie-down hook for towing
purpose.
The towing hooks should be used only in an emergency (e.g., to free a
stuck vehicle from mud, sand or snow).
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
9
In case of emergency
9-13
– CONTINUED –
B Using a flat-bed truck
HS0161
This is the best way to transport your vehicle. Use the following proce-
dures to ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the selector lever into the “P” position for automatic transmis-
sion vehicles or “1st” for manual transmission vehicles.
2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier properly with safety chains.
Each safety chain should be equally tightened and care must be tak-
en not to pull the chains so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
B Towing with all wheels on the ground
WARNING
D Never turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position while the
vehicle is being towed because the steering wheel and the direc-
tion of the wheels will be locked.
D Remember that the brake booster and power steering do not
function when the engine is not running. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take greater effort to operate the brake pedal and
steering wheel.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
9-14
CAUTION
D If transmission failure occurs, transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
D For AWD vehicles, the traveling speed must be limited to less
than 20 mph (30 km/h) and the traveling distance to less than 31
miles (50 km). For greater speeds and distances, transport your
vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
HS0163
We do not recommend this method of towing. Use this method only
when towing service by a SUBARU dealer or a commercial towing
service is not available.
1. Check the transmission and differential oil levels and add oil to
bring it to the upper level if necessary.
2. Release the parking brake and put the transmission in neutral.
3. The ignition switch should be in the “ACC” position while the ve-
hicle is being towed.
4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to prevent damage to the ve-
hicle.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
9
In case of emergency
9-15
– CONTINUED –
Moonroof – if the moonroof cannot be closed
If the moonroof cannot be closed with the moonroof switch, you can
close the sunroof manually.
1. Take out the hex-headed wrench from the glove compartment and
screwdriver from the tool bag.
HS0360
2. Remove the plug on the roof trim located to the rear of the moonroof
by inserting the end of the regular scredriver between the roof and plug
and prying it off.
HS0361
3. Insert the wrench in the end of the motor shaft.
To close the moonroof, turn the wrench counterclockwise.
Have your vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized SUBARU
dealer.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
9-16
Maintenance tools
HS0331
Your vehicle is equipped with the following maintenance tools:
Screwdriver
Wheel nut wrench
Hex-headed wrench (for vehicle with moonroof)
J Tire changing tools
HSF010BC
Jack
Jack
handle
Spare tire
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
10
Appearance care
Exterior care 10-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing 10-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waxing and polishing 10-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning aluminum wheels 10-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning fog light lens 10-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrosion protection 10-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the interior 10-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
10-2
Exterior care
J Washing
CAUTION
D When washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result,
the brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes,
drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes.
D Do not wash the engine compartment and areas adjacent to it.
If water enters the engine air intake, electrical parts or the power
steering fluid reservoir, it will cause engine trouble or faulty pow-
er steering respectively.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s beauty is frequent washing.
Wash the vehicle at least once a month to avoid contamination by road
grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of lukewarm or cold water. Do
not wash the vehicle with hot water and in direct sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot and bird droppings should be washed
off by using a light detergent, as required. If you use a light detergent,
make certain that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use strong soap or
chemical detergents. All cleaning agents should be promptly flushed
from the surface and not allowed to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the remaining water off with a
chamois or soft cloth.
B Washing the underbody
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for deicing road surfaces are ex-
tremely corrosive, accelerating the corrosion of underbody compo-
nents, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake
cables, floor pan and fenders, and suspension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside of the fenders with luke-
warm or cold water at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful effects
of such agents.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
10
Appearance care
10-3
– CONTINUED –
B Using a warm water washer
D Keep a good distance of 12 inches (30 cm) or more between the
washer nozzle and the vehicle.
D Do not wash the same area continuously.
D If a stain will not come out easily, wash by hand. Some warm water
washers are of the high temperature, high pressure type and they can
damage or deform the resin parts such as mouldings, or cause water
to leak into the vehicle.
J Waxing and polishing
Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and apply them according to the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax or polish when the painted surface is
cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, as well as the painted sur-
faces. Loss of wax on a painted surface leads to loss of the original lus-
ter and also quickens the deterioration of the surface. It is recommended
that a coat of wax be applied at least once a month, or whenever the
surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has diminished to the point where the lus-
ter or tone cannot be restored, lightly polish the surface with a fine-
grained compound. Never polish just the affected area, but include the
surrounding area as well. Always polish in only one direction. A No. 2000
grain compound is recommended. Never use a coarse-grained com-
pound. Coarser grained compounds have a smaller grain-size number
and could damage the paint. After polishing with a compound, coat with
wax to restore the original luster. Frequent polishing with a compound or
an incorrect polishing technique will result in removing the paint layer
and exposing the undercoat. When in doubt, it is always best to contact
your SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specialist.
J Cleaning aluminum wheels
D Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels clean of any kind of grime or
agent. If dirt is left on too long, it may be difficult to clean off.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
10-4
D Do not use soap containing grit to clean the wheels. Be sure to use a
neutral cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly with water. Do not
clean the wheels with a stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed wash-
ing device.
D Clean the vehicle (including the aluminum wheels) with water as soon
as possible when it has been splashed with sea water, exposed to sea
breezes, or driven on roads treated with salt or other agents.
J Cleaning fog light lens
If the fog light protector ought to be removed for cleaning the fog light
lens, follow then the instruction given in “Fog light” section (Replacing
bulbs) under Chapter 11.
When cleaning the fog light lens, park the vehicle on a safe place, stop
the engine and confirm that the fog light lens is not hot before proceed-
ing with the work.
Corrosion protection
Your SUBARU has been designed and built to resist corrosion. Special
materials and protective finishes have been used on most parts of the
vehicle to help maintain fine appearance, strength, and reliable opera-
tion.
B Most common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion are:
1. The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body
panel sections, cavities, and other areas.
2. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel
and stone chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle when:
1. It is exposed to road salt or dust control chemicals, or used in
coastal areas where there is more salt in the air, or in areas where
there is considerable industrial pollution.
2. It is driven in areas of high humidity, especially when temperatures
range just above freezing.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
10
Appearance care
10-5
– CONTINUED –
3. Dampness in certain parts of the vehicle remains for a long time,
even though other parts of the vehicle may be dry.
4. High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of the vehicle
which cannot dry quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.
B To help prevent corrosion
Wash the vehicle frequently. If you drive on salted roads in the winter
or if you live in a coastal area, you should flush the underbody with
fresh water frequently.
After the winter has ended, it is recommended that the underbody be
given a very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the condition of underbody
components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake
cables, suspension, steering system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should be given an appropriate rust
prevention treatment or should be replaced. Contact your SUBARU
dealer to perform this kind of maintenance and treatment if you need
assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water and dirt accumulation under
the floor mats because that could cause corrosion. Occasionally
check under the mats to make sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. In such a garage, corrosion can be caused by
dampness. If you wash the vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
into the garage when wet or covered with snow, that can cause
dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather and/or in areas where road
salts and other corrosive materials are used, the door hinges and
locks, trunk lid lock, and hood latch should be inspected and lubri-
cated periodically.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
10-6
Cleaning the interior
Use a vacuum cleaner to get rid of the dust and dirt. Wipe the vinyl areas
with a clean, damp cloth.
B Seat fabric
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is
caked on the fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum cleaner, use a
soft blush then vacuum it.
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung cloth and dry the seat
fabric thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution of mild
soap and lukewarm water then dry thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a commercially-available fabric
cleaner. Use the cleaner on a hidden place and make sure it does not
affect the fabric adversely. Use the cleaner according to its instruc-
tion.
B Leather seat materials
The leather used by SUBARU is a high quality natural product which
will retain its distinctive appearance and feel for many years with
proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the surface can cause the
material to become brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular cleaning
with a soft, moist, natural fiber cloth should be performed monthly,
taking care not to soak the leather or allow water to penetrate the
stitched seams.
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning woolen fabrics may be used to
remove difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry cloth afterwards to
restore the luster. If your SUBARU is to be parked for a long time in
bright sunlight, it is recommended that the seats and head restraints
be covered, or the windows shaded, to prevent fading or shrinkage.
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches may be treated with a com-
mercial leather spray lacquer. You will discover that each leather seat
section will develop soft folds or wrinkles, which is characteristic of
genuine leather.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
10
Appearance care
10-7
– CONTINUED –
B Leather upholstery
The leather used by SUBARU is a high quality natural product which
will retain its distinctive appearance and feel for many years with
proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the surface can cause the
material to become brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular cleaning
with a soft, moist, natural fiber cloth should be performed monthly,
taking care not to soak the leather or allow water to penetrate the
stitched seams.
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning woolen fabrics may be used to
remove difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry cloth afterwards to
restore the luster. If your SUBARU is to be parked for a long time in
bright sunlight, it is recommended that the upholstery items be cov-
ered, or the windows shaded, to prevent fading or shrinkage.
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches may be treated with a com-
mercial leather spray lacquer.
B Synthetic leather upholstery
The synthetic leather material used on the SUBARU may be cleaned
using mild soap or detergent and water, after first vacuuming or
brushing away loose dirt. Allow the soap to soak in for a few minutes
and wipe off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial foam-type clean-
ers suitable for synthetic leather materials may be used when neces-
sary.
NOTE
Strong cleaning agents such as solvents, paint thinners, window
cleaner or gasoline must never be used on leather or synthetic
interior materials.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
Maintenance schedule 11-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance precautions 11-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine hood 11-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment overview 11-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil 11-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling system 11-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant 11-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air cleaner element 11-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spark plugs 11-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive belts 11-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual transmission oil 11-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission fluid 11-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front differential gear oil (Automatic transmission
vehicles) 11-24
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear differential gear oil 11-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power steering fluid 11-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake fluid 11-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch fluid 11-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake booster 11-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery 11-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield washer fluid 11-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement of windshield wiper blades 11-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pedal 11-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch pedal (Manual transmission vehicles) 11-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement of brake pad and lining 11-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake stroke 11-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires and wheels 11-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of tires 11-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire inspection 11-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire pressures and wear 11-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel balance 11-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wear indicators 11-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire rotation 11-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire replacement 11-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel replacement 11-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-2
Aluminum wheels (If equipped) 11-49
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses 11-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main fuse 11-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of accessories 11-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing bulbs 11-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight 11-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog light (if equipped) 11-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front turn signal, parking light and front side marker light 11-57. . . . .
Rear combination lights 11-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
License plate light 11-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior light and luggage compartment light 11-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spot light 11-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High mount stop light 11-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-3
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance schedule
The scheduled maintenance items required to be serviced at regular in-
tervals are shown in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
For details of your maintenance schedule, read the separate “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”.
Maintenance precautions
When maintenance and service are required, it is recommended that all
work be done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service by yourself, you should familiar-
ize yourself with the information provided in this section on general main-
tenance and service for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could cause improper or unsafe vehicle
operation. Any problems caused by improper maintenance and service
performed by you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
WARNING
D Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle must NEVER be per-
formed on a single two-wheel dynamometer or similar apparatus
nor should you install the FWD fuse in the engine compartment.
Attempting to do so will result in transmission damage and in
uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or
injuries to persons nearby.
D Always select a safe area when performing maintenance on
your vehicle.
D Always be very careful to avoid injury when working on the ve-
hicle. Remember that some of the materials in the vehicle may be
hazardous if improperly used or handled, for example, battery
acid.
D Your vehicle should only be serviced by persons fully compe-
tent to do so. Serious personal injury may result to persons not
experienced in servicing vehicles.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-4
D Always use the proper tools and make certain that they are
well maintained.
D Never get under the vehicle supported only by a jack. Always
use a safety stand to support the vehicle.
D Never keep the engine running in a poorly ventilated area,
such as a garage or other closed areas.
D Do not smoke or allow open flames around the fuel or battery.
This will cause a fire.
D Wear adequate eye protection to guard against getting oil or
other fluids in your eyes. If something does get in your eyes,
thoroughly wash it out with clean water.
D Because the fuel system is under pressure, replacement of the
fuel filter should be performed only by your SUBARU dealer.
D The SRS airbag has no user-serviceable parts. Tampering with
or disconnecting the system’s wiring could result in accidental
inflation of the airbag or could make the system inoperative,
which may result in serious injury. The wiring harnesses of the
SRS airbag system are covered with yellow insulation and the
connectors of the system are yellow, for easy identification. Do
not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS
airbag system. For required servicing of the SRS airbag, see your
nearest SUBARU dealer.
J Before checking or servicing in the engine
compartment
D Always stop the engine and set the parking brake firmly to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving.
D Always let the engine cool down. Engine parts become very
hot when the engine is running and remain hot for some time af-
ter the engine is stopped.
D Do not spill engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components. This may cause a fire.
D Always remove the key from the ignition switch. When the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the cooling fan may oper-
ate suddenly even when the engine is stopped.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-5
– CONTINUED –
J When you do checking or servicing in the engine
compartment while the engine is running
A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any
other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is
advisable.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-6
Engine hood
WARNING
Always check that the hood is properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open while the vehicle is moving
and block your view, which may cause an accident and serious
bodily injury.
HS0025
HS0026
HS0024
To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood release knob under the instrument panel.
2. Release the secondary hood release located under the front of the
engine hood by moving the lever toward the left. Lift up the hood, release
the hood prop from its retainer and put the end of the hood prop into the
slot in the hood.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-7
– CONTINUED –
To close the hood:
1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the hood prop from the slot in the
hood and return the prop to its retainer.
2. Lower the hood until it approaches about 6 in. (15 cm) from the
closed position and let it drop.
3. After closing the hood, be sure the hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it from a slightly higher position.
Do not push the hood forcibly to close it. It could deform the metal.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-8
Engine compartment overview
1 Manual transmission oil level
gauge (MT) (page 11-21) or
Differential gear oil level
gauge (AT) (page 11-24)
2 Air cleaner element
(page 11-18)
3 Clutch fluid reservoir
(page 11-30)
4 Automatic transmission fluid
level gauge (page 11-22)
5 Brake fluid reservoir
(page 11-28)
6 Fuel filter
7 Windshield washer tank
(page 11-33)
8 Fuse box (page 11-49)
9 Battery (page 11-31)
Q Engine oil filler cap
(page 11-9)
W Engine coolant reservoir
(page 11-15)
E Engine oil level gauge
(page 11-9)
R Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-27)
T Radiator cap (page 11-15)
HGA017BB
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-9
– CONTINUED –
Engine oil
B Checking the oil level
Check the engine oil level at each fuel stop.
HBB061BBHS0173
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine.
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it again.
3. Be sure the dipstick is correctly inserted until it stops with the
graphic symbol on its top appearing as shown in the illustra-
tion.
4. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it. If it is below
the lower level, add oil to bring the level up to the upper level.
CAUTION
Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
If you check the oil level just after stopping the engine, wait a few min-
utes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan before checking the level.
Just after driving or while the engine is warm, the engine oil level
reading may be in a range between the upper level and the notch
mark. This is caused by thermal expansion of the engine oil.
To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not add any additional oil
above the upper level when the engine is cold.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-10
B Changing the oil and oil filter
Change the oil and oil filter according to the maintenance schedule in
the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
The engine oil and oil filter must be changed more frequently than
listed in the maintenance schedule when driving on dusty roads,
when short trips are frequently made when towing a trailer, or when
driving in extremely cold whether.
1. Warm up the engine by letting the engine idle for about 10 minutes
to ease draining the engine oil.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine.
3. Remove the oil filler cap.
HS0174
Drain plug
4. Drain out the engine oil by removing the drain plug while the en-
gine is still warm. The used oil should be drained into an appropriate
container and disposed of properly.
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself with hot engine oil.
5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain plug with a clean cloth and
tighten it securely with a new sealing washer after the oil has com-
pletely drained out.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-11
– CONTINUED –
HS0176HS0175
Drain plug
Sealing washer
Oil filter
6. Remove the under cover.
7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.
8. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a thin coat of engine oil to the
seal.
9. Clean the rubber seal seating area of the lower crank case and
install the oil filter by hand turning. Be careful not to twist or damage
the seal.
10. Tighten it approximately two-thirds of a turn after the seal makes
contact with underside of the crank case.
CAUTION
Never over tighten the oil filter because that can result in an oil
leak.
11. Reinstall the under cover.
12. Pour the specified amount of engine oil through the filler neck.
Oil capacity: 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
13. Start the engine and make sure that no oil leaks appear around
the filter’s rubber seal.
14. Run the engine until it reaches the normal operating temperature.
Then stop the engine and wait a few minutes to allow the oil drain
back. Check the oil level again and if necessary, add more engine oil.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-12
B Recommended grade and viscosity
CAUTION
Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: API classification SJ or SH with the words “ENERGY
CONSERVING II” (if you cannot obtain the oil with SJ
or SH grade, you may use SG grade oil.) or the new
API mark (Starburst mark) displayed on the container.
New API Certification Mark
(Starburst Mark)
API Service label
1
2
3
1 Indicates the oil quality by API designations
2 Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade
3 Indicates that the oil has fuel saving capabilities
In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well
as one that will add to fuel economy. The following table lists the rec-
ommended viscosities and applicable temperatures.
When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as
they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity as those rec-
ommended by SUBARU.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel economy. Oils of lower vis-
cosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of
higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the engine.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-13
– CONTINUED –
OM-H2756
SAE viscosity number and applicable
temperature
B Recommended grade and viscosity under severe driving
conditions
If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in areas with very high tempera-
tures, or used for heavy-duty applications such as a towing a trailer,
use of oil with the following grade and viscosities is recommended.
API classification SJ or SH:
SAE viscosity No.: 30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-14
Cooling system
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has
been shut off and has cooled down completely. Since the coolant
is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray of
boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed.
CAUTION
D The cooling system has been filled at the factory with a high
quality, corrosion-inhibiting, year-around coolant which provides
protection against freezing down to –33°F (–36°C). For adding,
use genuine SUBARU coolant or an equivalent: a mixture of 50%
soft water and 50% ethylene-glycol basis coolant. Use of improp-
er coolants may result in corrosion in the cooling system. It is im-
portant to maintain protection against freezing and corrosion,
even if freezing temperatures are not expected. Never mix differ-
ent kinds of coolant.
D Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alco-
hol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint sur-
face.
B Hose and connections
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling fan which is thermostatically
controlled to operate when the engine coolant reaches a specific tem-
perature.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate even when the engine
coolant temperature gauge exceeds the normal operating range, the
cooling fan circuit may be defective. Check the fuse and replace it if
necessary. If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling system checked
by your SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is necessary, there may be a leak in the
engine cooling system. It is recommended that the cooling system
and connections be checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-15
– CONTINUED –
J Engine coolant
B Checking the coolant level
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
HS0178
“FULL”
level mark
“LOW”
level mark
1. Check the coolant level on the outside of the reservoir while the
engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the “LOW” level mark, add
coolant up to the “FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is empty, re-
move the radiator cap and refill as required.
HG0115
Rubber gaskets
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the radiator, reinstall the caps
and check that the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap are in the
proper position.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-16
B Changing the coolant
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has
been shut off and has cooled down completely. Since the coolant
is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray of
boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed.
Change the engine coolant in the following procedures according to
the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let”.
1. Remove the under cover.
2. Place a proper container under the drain plug and loosen the drain
plug.
HSA002BBHSA001BB
3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the coolant from the radiator. Then
drain the coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the drain plug secure-
ly.
4. Install the under cover.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-17
– CONTINUED –
HS0178HSA003BB
“FULL”
level mark
“LOW”
level mark
5. Slowly pour the coolant and fill to the radiator filler neck and to the
reserve tank’s “FULL” level mark. Do not pour the coolant too quickly,
as this may lead to insufficient air bleeding and trapped air in the sys-
tem.
Coolant capacity
6.6 US qt (6.2 liters, 5.5 Imp qt)
HG0115
Rubber gaskets
6. Put the radiator cap back on and tighten firmly. At this time, make
sure that the rubber gaskets in the radiator cap are correctly in place.
7. Start and run the engine for more than five minutes at 2,000 to
3,000 rpm.
8. Stop the engine and wait until the coolant cools down (122 to
140°F [50 to 60 °C]). If there is any loss of coolant, add coolant to the
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-18
radiator’s filler neck and to the reserve tank’s “Full” level.
9. Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap back on and tighten firmly.
Air cleaner element
WARNING
Do not operate the engine with the air cleaner element removed.
The air cleaner element not only filters intake air but also stops
flames if the engine backfires. If the air cleaner element is not
installed when the engine backfires, you could be burned.
The air cleaner element functions as a filter screen. When the element is
perforated or removed, engine wear will be excessive and engine life
shortened.
The air cleaner element is a viscous type. It is unnecessary to clean or
wash the element.
B Replacing the air cleaner element
Replace the air cleaner element according to the maintenance sched-
ule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under extremely
dusty conditions, replace it more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
HBA003BBHBA002BB
1. Remove the bolt securing the rear air cleaner element case.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-19
– CONTINUED –
2. Unsnap the three clamps holding the rear air cleaner element
case.
3. Separate the rear air cleaner element case from the front air clean-
er element case and remove the air cleaner element.
4. Clean the inside of the front and rear air cleaner element cases
with a damp cloth and install a new air cleaner element.
5. Insert the four projections on the rear air cleaner element case into
the slits on the front air cleaner element case and snap the three
clamps on the rear air cleaner element case and then tighten the bolt.
Spark plugs
CAUTION
D When disconnecting the spark plug cables, always grasp the
spark plug cap, not the cables.
D Make sure the cables are replaced in the correct order.
HBA004BA
It may be difficult to replace the spark plugs. It is recommended that you
have the spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced according to the maintenance
schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-20
B Recommended spark plugs
RC10YC4 (Champion)
BKR6E-11 (NGK)
BKR5E-11 (NGK)
Drive belts
The alternator, power steering pump, and air conditioner compressor de-
pend on drive belts. Satisfactory performance requires that belt tension
be correct.
HGA005BB
in. (mm)
Deflection
New belt Used belt
1
0.28 — 0.35
(7.0 — 9.0)
0.35 — 0.43
(9.0 — 11.0)
2
0.30 — 0.33
(7.5 — 8.5)
0.35 — 0.40
(9.0 — 10.0)
To check belt tension, place a straightedge (ruler) across two adjacent
pulleys and apply a force of 98 N (22 lb, 10 kg) midway between the
pulleys by using a spring scale. Belt deflection should be the amount
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-21
– CONTINUED –
specified. If a belt is loose, cracked, or worn, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
Manual transmission oil
B Checking the oil level
Check the oil level monthly.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine.
OM-H0210HSA002CB
Upper level
Lower level
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it again.
3. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it. If it is below
the lower level, add oil through the dipstick hole to bring the level up
to the upper level.
B Recommended grade and viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use
different brands together.
Oil grade: API classification GL-5
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-22
SAE viscosity No. and Applicable Temperature
OM-H0205
Automatic transmission fluid
B Checking the fluid level
The automatic transmission fluid expands largely as its temperature
rises; the fluid level differs according to fluid temperature. Therefore,
there are two different scales for checking the level of hot fluid and
cold fluid on the dipstick.
Though the fluid level can be checked without warming up the fluid
on the “COLD” range, we recommend checking the fluid level when
the fluid is at operating temperature.
n Checking the fluid level when the fluid is hot
Check the fluid level monthly.
1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise the temperature of the
transmission fluid up to normal operating temperature; 140 to 176°F
(60 to 80 °C) is normal.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake.
3. First shift the selector lever in each position. Then shift it in the “P”
position, and run the engine at idling speed.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-23
– CONTINUED –
HBA008BBHSA002DB
4. Pull out the dipstick and check the fluid level on the gauge. If it is
below the lower level on the “HOT” range, add the recommended au-
tomatic transmission fluid up to the upper level.
n Checking the fluid level when the fluid is cold
When the fluid level has to be checked without time to warm up the
automatic transmission, check to see that the fluid level is between
the lower level and upper level on the “COLD” range. If it is below that
range, add fluid up to the upper level. Be careful not to overfill.
B Recommended fluid
“Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmission Fluid
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-24
Front differential gear oil
(Automatic transmission vehicles)
B Checking the oil level
Check the differential oil level monthly.
HBA010BBHSA002EB
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine.
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it again.
3. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it. If it is below
the lower level, add oil to bring the level up to the upper level.
B Recommended grade and viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use
different brands together.
Oil grade: API classification GL-5
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-25
– CONTINUED –
SAE viscosity No. and Applicable Temperature
OM-H0212
Rear differential gear oil
B Checking the oil level
CAUTION
If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be an oil leak.
If you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your
SUBARU dealer.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear differential protector. The
differential protector provides protection to the rear differential assem-
bly during off-road use. Removal of the rear differential protector is not
required when checking the oil level.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-26
HB0078HB0077
Filler hole
Drain hole
Filler hole
Drain hole
Oil level
Remove the plug from the filler hole and check the oil level. The oil
level should be kept even with the bottom of the filler hole. If the oil
level is below the bottom edge of the hole, add oil through the filler
hole to raise the level.
B Recommended grade and viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use
different brands together.
Oil grade: API classification GL-5
SAE viscosity No. and Applicable Temperature
OM-H0205
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-27
– CONTINUED –
Power steering fluid
The power steering fluid expands greatly as its temperature rises; the
fluid level differs according to fluid temperature. Therefore, the dipstick
has two different checking ranges for hot and cold fluids.
B Checking the fluid level when the fluid is hot
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself because the fluid may be hot.
CAUTION
D When power steering fluid is being added, use only clean fluid,
and be careful not to allow any dirt into the tank. And never use
different brands together.
D Avoid spilling fluid when adding it in the tank.
Check the power steering fluid level monthly.
1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise the temperature of the pow-
er steering fluid up to normal operating temperature, about 140°F
(60°C).
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and stop the engine.
3. Turn the reservoir cap counterclockwise to remove the fluid level
dipstick, wipe the dipstick clean, and reinsert it.
HS0186HS0185
Specified
range
Specified
range
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-28
4. Remove the dipstick again and check the fluid level on it. If it is
below the lower level of the “HOT” range, add the recommended
steering fluid up to the specified range of the dipstick.
If the fluid level is extreme low, it may indicate possible leakage. Con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for inspection.
B Checking the fluid level when the fluid is cold
When the fluid level has to be checked without warming up the power
steering system (approximately 70°F [21°C]), read the fluid level on
the “COLD” range.
B Recommended fluid
“Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmission Fluid
Brake fluid
B Checking the fluid level
WARNING
D Never let brake fluid contact your eyes because brake fluid can
be harmful to your eyes. If brake fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.
D Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed mois-
ture can cause a dangerous loss of braking performance.
D If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your
SUBARU dealer.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-29
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
D Never use different brands of brake fluid together.
D When adding brake fluid, be careful not to allow any dirt into
the reservoir.
D Never splash the brake fluid over painted surfaces or rubber
parts. Alcohol contained in the brake fluid may damage them.
Check the fluid level monthly.
HSA004BB
Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If the level is be-
low “MIN”, add the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”.
Use only brake fluid from a sealed container.
B Recommended brake fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-30
Clutch fluid
WARNING
Never let clutch fluid contact your eyes because clutch fluid can
be harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.
CAUTION
D Clutch fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed
moisture can cause improper clutch operation.
D If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your
SUBARU dealer.
D Never use different brands of clutch fluid together.
D When clutch fluid is added, be careful not to allow any dirt into
the tank.
Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If the level is below
“MIN” level mark, add the recommended clutch fluid to “MAX” level mark.
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed container.
HSA002FB
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-31
– CONTINUED –
B Recommended clutch fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid
Brake booster
If the brake booster does not operate as described below, have it
checked by your SUBARU dealer.
1. With the engine off, depress the brake pedal several times, applying
the same pedal force each time. The distance the pedal travels should
not vary.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start the engine. The pedal should
move slightly down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine and keep the pedal
depressed for 30 seconds. The pedal height should not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for about one minute then turn it off.
Depress the brake pedal several times to check the brake booster.
Brake booster operates properly if the pedal stroke decreases with each
depression.
Battery
WARNING
D Before beginning work on or near any battery, be sure to extin-
guish all cigarettes, matches, and lighters. Never expose a bat-
tery to an open flame or electric sparks. Batteries give off a gas
which is highly flammable and explosive.
D For safety, in case an explosion does occur, wear eye protec-
tion or shield your eyes when working near any battery. Never
lean over a battery.
D Do not let battery fluid contact eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-
cause battery fluid is a corrosive acid. If battery fluid gets on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the area with water thor-
oughly. Seek medical help immediately if acid has entered the
eyes.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-32
D To lessen the risk of sparks, remove rings, metal watchbands,
and other metal jewelry. Never allow metal tools to contact the
positive battery terminal and anything connected to it WHILE you
are at the same time in contact with any other metallic portion of
the vehicle because a short circuit will result.
D Keep everyone including children away from the battery.
D Charge the battery in a well-ventilated area.
D Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after han-
dling.
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes when charging the battery be-
cause it will shorten battery life.
B Checking the fluid level
OM-H1048
Upper level
Lower level
Cap
It is unnecessary to periodically check the battery fluid level or peri-
odically refill with distilled water.
However, if the battery fluid level is below the lower level, remove the
cap. Fill to the upper level with distilled water.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-33
– CONTINUED –
Windshield washer fluid
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer fluid because it could cause
paint damage.
Check the level of the washer fluid at each fuel stop. If the level is low, fill
the fluid up to the neck of the reservoir.
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield washer fluid is unavailable use
clean water.
In areas where water freezes in winter, use an anti-freeze type windshield
washer fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid contains 58.5% methyl
alcohol and 41.5% surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temperature varies
according to how much it is diluted, as indicated below.
Washer Fluid Concentration Freezing Temperature
30%
50%
100%
10.4°F (–12°C)
–4 °F (–20°C)
–49°F (–45°C)
HS0189
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-34
Replacement of windshield wiper blades
Grease, wax, insects, or other materials on the windshield or the wiper
blade results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If you
cannot remove the streaks after operating the windshield washer or if the
wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield (or rear
window) and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the windshield
and wiper blades with clean water. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse the windshield with water.
CAUTION
Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such as
paint thinner or benzene. This will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this method,
replace the wiper blades using the following procedures:
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by holding its pivot area and push-
ing it in the direction shown by the arrow while depressing the wiper
blade stopper.
HS0190
Stopper
3. Grasp the locked end of the blade rubber assembly and pull it firmly
until the stoppers on the rubber are free of the metal support.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-35
– CONTINUED –
HS0191
Metal support
4. If the new blade rubber is not provided with two metal spines, remove
the metal spines from the old blade rubber and install them in the new
blade rubber.
HS0192
Metal spines
5. Align the claws of the metal support with the grooves in the rubber
and slide the blade rubber assembly into the metal support until it locks.
Be sure to position the claws at the end of the metal support between the
stoppers on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is not retained properly,
the wiper blade may scratch the windshield.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-36
HS0194HS0193
Stopper
6. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm. Make sure that it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-37
– CONTINUED –
Brake pedal
Check the brake pedal free play and reserve distance according to the
maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
B Checking the brake pedal free play
OM-H0224
0.04 — 0.12 in
(1.0 — 3.0 mm)
Stop the engine and firmly depress the brake pedal several times.
Lightly press the brake pedal down with one finger to check the free
play with a force of less than 10 N (2 lb, 1 kg).
If the free play is not within proper specification, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
B Checking the brake pedal reserve distance
OM-H0225
More than
2.56 in
(65 mm)
Depress the pedal with a force of approximately 294 N (66 lb, 30 kg)
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-38
and measure the distance between the upper surface of the pedal
pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than the specification, or when the
pedal does not operate smoothly, contact with your SUBARU dealer.
Clutch pedal (Manual transmission vehicles)
Check the clutch pedal free play and reserve distance according to the
maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
B Checking the clutch function
Check the clutch engagement and disengagement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there are no abnormal noises
when the clutch pedal is depressed, and that shifting into 1st or re-
verse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal slowly to check that the en-
gine and transmission smoothly couple without any sign of slippage.
B Checking the clutch pedal free play
OM-H0224
0.16 — 0.51 in
(4.0 — 13.0 mm)
Lightly press the clutch pedal down with your finger until you feel re-
sistance, and check the free play.
If the free play is not within proper specification, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-39
– CONTINUED –
Replacement of brake pad and lining
CAUTION
If you continue to drive despite the scraping noise from the audi-
ble brake pad wear indicator, it will result in the need for costly
brake rotor repair or replacement.
OM-H0163
The front disc brakes and the right side rear disc brake have audible
wear indicators on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear close to their
service limit, the wear indicator makes a very audible scraping noise
when the brake pedal is applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time you apply the brake pedal,
have the brake pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
B Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings
When replacing the brake pad or lining, use only genuine SUBARU
parts. After replacement, the new parts must be broken in as follows:
n Brake pad and lining
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on
the brake pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more times.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-40
n Parking brake lining
WARNING
A safe location and situation should be selected for break-in driv-
ing.
CAUTION
Pulling the parking brake lever too forcefully may cause the rear
wheels to lock. To avoid this, be certain to pull the lever up slowly
and gently.
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of about 22 mph (35 km/h).
2. With the parking brake release button pushed in, pull the parking
brake lever SLOWLY and GENTLY. (Pulling with a force of approxi-
mately 147 N [33 lb, 15 kg].)
3. Drive the vehicle for about 220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking brake to cool down. Repeat
this procedure.
5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the parking brake stroke is out
of the specified range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut located
on the parking brake lever.
Parking brake stroke: 7 — 8 notches / 196 N (44 lb, 20 kg)
Parking brake stroke
Check the parking brake stroke according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. When the parking brake is
properly adjusted, braking power is fully applied by pulling the lever up
seven to eight notches gently but firmly (about 196 N, 44 lb, 20 kg). If the
parking brake lever stroke is not within the specified range, have the
brake system checked and adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-41
– CONTINUED –
HS0199
7 to 8 notches
Tires and wheels
J Types of tires
B All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide an adequate measure of trac-
tion, handling and braking performance in year-round driving includ-
ing snowy and icy road conditions. However all season tires do not
have adequate traction performance compared with winter (snow)
tires in heavy or loose snow or on icy road.
All season tires are identified by “ALL SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud &
Snow) on the tire sidewall.
B Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed capability tires best suited for highway
driving under dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving on slippery roads such as on
snow-covered or icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered or icy roads, we strongly
recommend the use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-42
B Winter (snow) tires
Winter tires are best suited for driving on snow-covered and icy
roads. However winter tires do not have adequate performance
compared with summer tires and all season tires on roads other than
snow-covered and icy roads.
J Tire inspection
Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from serious damage, nails,
and stones. At the same time, check the tires for abnormal wear.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately if you find any problem.
NOTE
D When the wheels and tires strike curbs or are subjected to harsh
treatment as when the vehicle is driven on a rough surface, they can
suffer damage that cannot be seen with the naked eye. This type of
damage does not become evident until time has passed. Try not to
drive over curbs, potholes or other rough surfaces. If doing so is un-
avoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed down to a walking pace or less,
and approach the curbs as squarely as possible. Also, make sure
the tires are not pressed against the curbs when you park the ve-
hicle.
D If you feel unusual vibration while driving or find it difficult to
steer the vehicle in a straight line, one of the tires and/or wheels
may be damaged. Drive slowly to the nearest authorized SUBARU
dealer and have the vehicle inspected.
J Tire pressures and wear
Maintaining the correct tire pressures helps to maximize the tires’ service
lives and is essential for good running performance. Check and, if nec-
essary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least
once a month (for example, during a fuel stop) and before any long jour-
ney.
Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge
to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire placard. The
tire placard is located on the door pillar on the driver’s side.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-43
– CONTINUED –
HS0251
Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire
pressures. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the ambient tempera-
ture. It is best to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands, causing the tire
pressure to increase. Be careful not to mistakenly release air from a
warm tire to reduce its pressure.
NOTE
D The air pressure in a tire increases by approximately 4.3 psi (30
kPa, 0.3 kg/cm
2
) when the tire becomes warm.
D The tires are considered cold when the vehicle has been parked
for at least three hours or has been driven less than one mile (1.6
km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to adjust pressure. Doing so will
result in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from controllability and ride comfort, and
they cause the tires to wear abnormally.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-44
D Correct tire pressure (tread worn evenly)
HGB033AA
Roadholding is good, and steering is responsive. Rolling resistance is
low, so fuel consumption is also lower.
D Abnormally low tire pressure (tread worn at shoulders)
HSB012AA
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel consumption is also higher.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-45
– CONTINUED –
D Abnormally high tire pressure (tread worn in center)
HSB013AA
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire magnifies the effects of road-sur-
face bumps and dips, possibly resulting in vehicle damage.
If the tire placard shows tire pressures for the vehicle when fully loaded
and for the vehicle when towing a trailer, adjust the tire pressures to the
values that match current loading conditions.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can
cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly become hot. A
sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and
destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of vehicle control
could lead to an accident.
J Wheel balance
Each wheel was correctly balanced when your vehicle was new, but the
wheels will become unbalanced as the tires become worn during use.
Wheel imbalance causes the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at certain
vehicle speeds and detracts from the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It
can also cause steering and suspension systems problems and abnor-
mal tire wear. If you suspect that the wheels are not correctly balanced,
have them checked and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer. Also have
them adjusted after tire repairs and after tire rotation.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-46
NOTE
Loss of correct wheel alignment* causes the tires to wear on one
side and reduces the vehicle’s running stability. Contact your
SUBARU dealer if you notice abnormal tire wear.
* : The suspension system is designed to hold each wheel at a certain alignment
(relative to the other wheels and to the road) for optimum straight-line stability and
cornering performance.
J Wear indicators
Each tire incorporates a tread wear indicator, which becomes visible
when the depth of the tread grooves decreases to 0.063 in. (1.6 mm). A
tire must be replaced when the tread wear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
OM-H0231
WARNING
When a tire’s tread wear indicator becomes visible, the tire is
worn beyond the acceptable limit and must be replaced immedi-
ately. With a tire in this condition, driving at high speeds in wet
weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. The resulting loss
of vehicle control can lead to an accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect the tire tread regularly and replace the tires be-
fore their tread wear indicators become visible.
A) New tread
B) Worn tread
1) Tread wear indicator
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-47
– CONTINUED –
J Tire rotation
OM-H0230
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To maximize the life of each tire
and ensure that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to rotate the tires every
7,500 miles (12,500 km). Rotating the tires involves switching the front
and rear tires on the right-hand side of the vehicle and similarly switching
the front and rear tires on the left-hand side of the vehicle. (Each tire
must be kept on its original side of the vehicle.)
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of rotation. After
tire rotation, adjust the tire pressures and make sure the wheel nuts are
correctly tightened.
After driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km), check the wheel nuts
again and retighten any nut that has become loose.
J Tire replacement
The wheels and tires are important and integral parts of your vehicle’s
design; they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires fitted as standard
equipment are optimally matched to the characteristics of the vehicle
and were selected to give the best possible combination of running per-
formance, ride comfort, and service life. It is essential for every tire to
have a size and construction matching those shown on the tire placard
and to have a speed symbol and load index matching those shown on
the tire placard.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts from controllability, ride com-
fort, braking performance, speedometer accuracy and odometer accu-
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-48
racy. It also creates incorrect body-to-tire clearances and inappropriately
changes the vehicle’s ground clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of manufacturer, brand (tread
pattern), construction, and size. You are advised to replace the tires with
new ones that are identical to those fitted as standard equipment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU recommends replacing all four tires
at the same time.
WARNING
D All four tires must be the same in terms of manufacturer, brand
(tread pattern), construction, degree of wear, speed symbol, load
index and size. Mixing tires of different types, sizes or degrees of
wear can result in damage to the vehicle’s power train. Use of dif-
ferent types or sizes of tires can also dangerously reduce con-
trollability and braking performance and can lead to an accident.
D Use only radial tires. Do not use radial tires together with
belted bias tires and/or bias-ply tires. Doing so can dangerously
reduce controllability, resulting in an accident.
J Wheel replacement
When replacing wheels due, for example, to damage, make sure the re-
placement wheels match the specifications of the wheels that are fitted
as standard equipment. Replacement wheels are available from
SUBARU dealers.
WARNING
Use only those wheels that are specified for your vehicle. Wheels
not meeting specifications could interfere with brake caliper op-
eration and may cause the tires to rub against the wheel well
housing during turns. The resulting loss of vehicle control could
lead to an accident.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-49
– CONTINUED –
Aluminum wheels (If equipped)
Aluminum wheels can be scratched and damaged easily. Handle them
carefully to maintain their appearance, performance, and safety.
D When any of the wheels is removed and replaced for tire rotation or to
change a flat, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after driving
approximatly 600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to the
specified torque.
D Never apply oil to the threaded parts, wheel nuts, or tapered surface
of the wheel.
D Never let the wheel rub against sharp protrusions or curbs.
D Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly and completely around the tire,
otherwise the chains may scratch the wheel.
D When wheel nuts, balance weights, or the center cap are replaced,
be sure to replace them with genuine SUBARU parts designed for alumi-
num wheels.
Fuses
HS0203HS0202
The fuses are designed to melt during an overload to prevent damage to
the wiring harness and electrical equipment. The fuses are located in
two fuse boxes.
If any lights, accessories or other electrical controls do not operate, in-
spect the corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace it.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-50
HS0204
Good Blown
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one having a higher rating or with mate-
rial other than a fuse because serious damage or a fire could re-
sult.
B Fuse box (behind the coin tray)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position and turn off all elec-
trical accessories.
HS0202
2. Open the coin tray and pull it horizontally to remove it.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown. The back side of the coin
tray and the “Fuse and circuits” section in chapter 12 in this manual
show the circuit for each fuse.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-51
– CONTINUED –
HSB011BBHS0207
Fuse puller
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is stored in the
main fuse box cover in the engine compartment.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, replace it with a spare fuse of the
same rating. The spare fuses are stored in the main fuse box cover in
the engine compartment.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this indicates that its system has a
problem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
B Main fuse box (in the engine compartment)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position and turn off all elec-
trical accessories.
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Remove the main fuse box cover.
4. Determine which fuse may be blown. The fuse box cover and
“Fuse and circuits” section in chapter 12 in this manual show the cir-
cuit for each fuse.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-52
HSB011BBHS0207
Fuse puller
5. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller provided in the main fuse box
cover.
6. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, replace it with a spare fuse of the
same rating. The spare fuses are stored in the main fuse box cover in
the engine compartment.
7. If the same fuse blows again, this indicates that its system has a
problem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-53
– CONTINUED –
Main fuse
HS0203
The main fuses are designed to melt during an overload to prevent dam-
age to the wiring harness and electrical equipment. Check the main
fuses if any electrical component fails to operate (except the starter mo-
tor) and other fuses are good. A melted main fuse must be replaced.
Use only replacements with the same specified rating as the melted
main fuse. If a main fuse blows after it is replaced, have the electrical
system checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing fog lights or any
other electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such accessories may cause
the electronic system to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if
they are not suited for the vehicle.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-54
Replacing bulbs
Wattage Bulb No.
1 Spot light (12V-8W) —
2 Room light (12V-8W) —
3 Front turn signal, parking light
and front side marker light (12V-27/8W Amber) 1157NA
4 Fog light (12V-51W) 9006
5 Headlight (12V-60/55W) HB2 (H4)
6 High mount stop light (12V-13W) 912
7 Backup light (12V-18W) 921
8 Rear turn signal light (12V-21W Amber) —
9 Brake/tail light (12V-21/5W) 7443
Q Tail light (12V-5W) 168
W License plate light (12V-5W) 168
HSF014CB
HSF015FB
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-55
– CONTINUED –
J Headlight
CAUTION
Halogen headlight bulbs become very hot while in use. If you
touch the bulb surface with bare hands or greasy gloves, finger
prints or grease on the bulb surface develop into hot spots, caus-
ing the bulb to break. If there are finger prints or grease on the
bulb surface, wipe them away with a soft cloth moistened with al-
cohol.
NOTE
If headlight aiming is required, consult your SUBARU dealer for
proper adjustment of the headlight aim.
HSB005BBHSB004BB
1. Disconnect the electrical connector, then remove the rubber cover.
2. Remove the retainer spring.
3. Replace the bulb, then set the retainer spring securely.
4. Install the rubber cover with the top mark facing up, then reconnect
the electrical connector.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-56
J Fog light (if equipped)
CAUTION
Halogen light bulbs become very hot while in use. If you touch
the bulb surface with bare hands or greasy gloves, finger prints
or grease on the bulb surface develop into hot spots, causing the
bulb to break. If there are finger prints or grease on the bulb sur-
face, wipe them away with a soft cloth moistened with alcohol.
B To remove and install the fog light protector
HS0214HS0213
1
2
1. Unhook the lower part of the fog light protector by pulling the hook
down.
2. Pull the protector to remove it.
3. To install the protector, first insert the upper part of the protector
into the gap between the fog light and body, then push the lower part
of the protector until it clicks.
4. Make sure that the protector is locked in place by pulling it lightly.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-57
– CONTINUED –
B Bulb replacement
HSB006BAHS0215
1. Remove the fog light protector.
2. Remove the fog light assembly by removing the two screws.
3. Disconnect the connector.
4. Remove the fog light bulb by turning it counterclockwise.
5. Replace the bulb with a new one. Then reconnect the connectors
and reinstall the removed parts in the reverse order of removal.
J Front turn signal, parking light and front side marker
light
HS0217
1. Remove the front turn signal light assembly mounting screw located
at the top of the headlight assembly using a phillips screwdriver.
2. Move the front turn signal light assembly forward until it pops out from
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-58
the fender.
3. Remove the bulb holder from the front turn signal light assembly by
turning it counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.
5. Set the bulb holder into the front turn signal light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
6. Set the front turn signal light assembly into the fender. Tighten the
mounting screw.
J Rear combination lights
B Brake/tail and rear turn signal light
HSB007BAHS0218
1. Unlatch the rear combination light cover by pulling the knob. Open
the cover up.
2. Remove the bulb holder from the rear combination light assembly
by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb from the socket.
Turn signal: Pushing it and turning counterclockwise.
Brake/tail: Pull the bulb out of the socket.
Install a new bulb.
4. Set the bulb holder into the rear combination light assembly and
turn it clockwise until it locks.
5. Close the cover and latch the lock.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-59
– CONTINUED –
B Back-up/tail light (in the rear gate)
HSA020BA
HSB002BB
1. Remove the rear combination light cover by prying the edge of the
cover with screwdriver.
2. Remove the bulb holder from the rear combination light assembly
by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Pull the bulb out of socket. Install a new bulb.
4. Set the bulb socket into the rear combination light and turn it clock-
wise untill it locks.
J License plate light
HS2009CA
1. Remove the mounting screws using a phillips screwdriver.
2. Remove the cover and lens.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-60
4. Reinstall the lens and cover.
5. Tighten the mounting screws.
J Interior light and luggage compartment light
HSA005BA
HS0223
HS0221
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with a regular screw-
driver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.
3. Reinstall the lens.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11
Maintenance and service
11-61
– CONTINUED –
J Spot light
HSA006BA
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with a regular screw-
driver.
2. Remove the plate by removing a mounting screw.
3 Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the plate and the lens.
J High mount stop light
OM-H0355
1. Remove the mounting screw covers by prying on the edge with a
screwdriver.
2. Remove the mounting screws using a phillips screwdriver and then
remove the high mount stop light cover.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
11-62
4. Reinstall the cover.
5. Tighten the mounting screws then reinstall the covers.
NOTE
Other bulbs may be difficult to replace. Have your SUBARU dealer
replace these bulbs if necessary.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
12
Specifications
Specifications 12-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions 12-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 12-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical system 12-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities 12-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires 12-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel alignment 12-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and circuits 12-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse panel located behind the coin tray 12-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse panel located in the engine compartment 12-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb chart 12-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle identification 12-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
12-2
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
J Dimensions
Overall length 175.6 in. (4,460 mm)
Overall width 68.3 in. (1,735 mm)
Overall height 62.8 in. (1,595 mm)
Ground clearance 7.5 in. (190 mm)
Front tread 58.1 in. (1,475 mm)
Rear tread 57.7 in. (1,465 mm)
Wheelbase 99.4 in. (2,525 mm)
J Engine
Engine model EJ251
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled
4 cylinder, 4 stroke gasoline engine
Engine displacement 149.9 cu in. (2,457 cc)
Bore 3.92 in. (99.5 mm)
Stroke 3.11 in. (79.0 mm)
Compression ratio 10.0 : 1
Firing order 1 - 3 - 2 - 4
J Electrical system
Battery
Type MT: 55D23L, AT: 75D23L
Reserve capacity MT: 99 min., AT: 118 min.
Cold cranking ampere MT: 356 amp., AT: 520 amp.
Alternator 12V - 75A
Spark plugs RC10YC4 (Champion),
BKR6E-11 (NGK),
BKR5E-11 (NGK)
Spark plug gap 0.039 to 0.043 in. (1.0 to 1.1 mm)
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
12
Specifications
12-3
– CONTINUED –
J Capacities
Fuel tank 15.9 US gal (60 liter, 13.2 Imp gal)
Engine oil 4.2 US qt (4.0 liter, 3.5 Imp qt)
Manual transmission oil 3.7 US qt (3.5 liter, 3.1 Imp qt)
Automatic transmission fluid 9.8 US qt (9.3 liter, 8.2 Imp qt)
AT differential gear oil 1.3 US qt (1.2 liter, 1.1 Imp qt)
AWD rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt)
Power steering fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)
Engine coolant 6.6 US qt (6.2 liter, 5.5 Imp qt)
J Tires
Type Steel belted radial, Tubeless
Size P205/70 R15 95S
P215/60 R16 94H
Pressure See the tire inflation pressure label
located under the driver’s door latch.
Wheel size 15 x 6J, 16 x 6
1
/
2
JJ
J Wheel alignment
Toe Front 0 " 0.12 in. (0 " 3 mm)
Rear 0.08 " 0.12 in. (2 " 3 mm)
Camber Front –0°15’
Rear –0°35’
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
12-4
Fuses and circuits
J Fuse panel located behind the coin tray
HS0224
1234 56
78 9Q WE
TYUI OPR
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
1 15A D Heater fan
2 15A D Heater fan
3 15A D Power door lock
4 20A D Cigarette lighter
D Remote controlled rear view mirrors
5 10A D Tail light
D Parking light
6 15A D SRS airbag
7 15A D Fog light
8 20A D ABS solenoid
9 15A D Radio
D Clock
10 Empty
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
12
Specifications
12-5
– CONTINUED –
Fuse panel CircuitFuse rating
11 15A D Engine ignition system
D SRS airbag
12 10A D Illumination brightness control
13 15A D Wiper deicer
14 Empty
15 20A D Windshield wiper and washer
D Rear window wiper and washer
16 20A D Brake light
17 15A D Air conditioner
18 15A D Backup light
D Cruise control
D ABS control
19 20A D Rear accessory power socket
D Seat heater
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
12-6
J Fuse panel located in the engine compartment
HS0225
Main fuse
FWD socket
A
S
K
L
Z
X
G
H
J
DF
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
20 20A D Radiator cooling fan (Main)
21 20A D Radiator cooling fan (Sub)
22 20A D Rear window defogger
23 15A D Hazard warning flasher
D Horn
24 15A D Meter
D SRS airbag system warning light
25 10A D Automatic transmission control unit
26 10A D Alternator
27 15A D Headlight (right side)
28 15A D Headlight (left side)
29 20A D Lighting switch
30 15A D Clock
D Interior light
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
12
Specifications
12-7
– CONTINUED –
Bulb chart
Description Wattage Bulb No.
Spot light 12V-8W —
Room light 12V-8W —
Front turn signal, parking light
and front side marker light 12V-27/8W Amber 1157NA
Fog light 12V-51W 9006
Headlight 12V-60/55W HB2 (H4)
Brake/tail light 12V-21/5W 7443
Rear turn signal light 12V-21W Amber —
Backup light 12V-18W 921
High mount stop light 12V-13W 912
License plate light 12V-5W 168
Tail light 12V-5W 168
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
12-8
Vehicle identification
HS0226
Vehicle
identification
number
Emission
control label
Vehicle identification number plate
Tire inflation pressure label
Model number plate
Bar cord label
Vacuum hose piping label
Certification
plate
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
13
Consumer information and
Reporting safety defects
Uniform tire quality grading standards 13-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Treadwear 13-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction AA, A, B, C 13-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature A, B, C 13-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting safety defects (USA) 13-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
13-2
For U.S.A.
The following information has been compiled according to Code of Fed-
eral Regulations “Title 49, Part 575”.
Uniform tire quality grading standards
This information indicates the relative performance of passenger car tires
in the area of treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. This is to
aid the consumer in making an informed choice in the purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall be-
tween the tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The quality grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. However, they do not apply to deep tread, winter type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diame-
ters of 12 inches or less, or to some limited production tires.
DOT quality grades – All passenger car tires must confirm to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
J Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1-1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to varia-
tions in driving habits, service practices and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
J Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of as-
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
13
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13-3
– CONTINUED –
phalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straightahead
braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, corner-
ing, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
J Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher lev-
els of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re-
quired by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under
inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combina-
tion, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
14-2
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) 7-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ABS warning light (for vehicles with ABS) 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessory power socket 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air cleaner element 11-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioner operation 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air filtration system (if equipped) 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum wheels (If equipped) 11-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antenna system 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtray 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AT OIL TEMPerature warning light (for AT vehicles) 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio set 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission 7-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission fluid 11-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B
Battery 11-31
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake booster 11-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake fluid 11-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pedal 11-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system 7-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system warning light 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Braking 7-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Braking tips 7-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb chart 12-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C
Capacities 12-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo anchorage eyelets 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo area light 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalytic converter 8-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD player (if equipped) 5-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center console 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Charge warning light 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp 3-11. . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
14
Index
14-3
Child restraint systems 1-25
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety locks 2-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter (if equipped) 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning aluminum wheels 10-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning fog light lens 10-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the interior 10-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch fluid 11-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch pedal (Manual transmission vehicles) 11-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coat hook 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coin tray 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling system 11-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrosion protection 8-15, 10-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control (if equipped) 7-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holder 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D
Dashboard storage compartment (if equipped) 6-4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions 12-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators 7-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door locks 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door open warning lights 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door storage compartment 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive belts 11-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving in foreign countries 8-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving tips for AWD vehicles 8-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E
Electrical system 12-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) 1-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 12-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment overview 11-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant 11-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) 8-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine hood 11-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil 11-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
14-4
Engine overheating 9-10
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior care 10-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F
Fastening the seatbelt 1-13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat tires 9-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog light (if equipped) 11-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog light switch (if equipped) 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front differential gear oil
(Automatic transmission vehicles) 11-24
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front turn signal, parking light and front side marker light 11-57. . . . . . . . . . . .
Front-wheel drive warning light (for AT vehicles) 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel economy hints 8-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel filler lid and cap 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel gauge 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel requirements 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse panel located behind the coin tray 12-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse panel located in the engine compartment 12-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses 11-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and circuits 12-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G
Gauges 3-6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove compartment 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
and Gross Axle Weight Rating) 8-17
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H
Hazard warning flasher 3-5, 9-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight 11-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater operation 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating and air conditioning control system 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High beam indicator 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High mount stop light 11-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
14
Index
14-5
Horn 3-28
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
Ignition switch 3-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illumination brightness control 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In-dash 6 CD auto changer 1 (if equipped) 5-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside mirror 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of accessories 5-2, 11-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior light 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior light and luggage compartment light 11-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J
Jump starting 9-8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K
Key interlock release (AT vehicles only) 3-4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless entry system (if equipped) 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key number 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key reminder chime 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L
License plate light 11-59
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light control switch 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading your vehicle 8-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage cover (if equipped) 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M
Main fuse 11-53
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance precautions 11-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance schedule 11-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance tools 9-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual transmission 7-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual transmission oil 11-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master, submaster and valet key 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
14-6
Moonroof (if equipped) 2-24
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moonroof – if the moonroof cannot be closed 9-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N
New vehicle break-in driving –
the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) 8-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O
Odometer/Trip meter 3-6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off road driving 8-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil pressure warning light 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating tips for heater and air conditioner 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside mirrors 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside temperature indicator (if equipped) 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overhead console 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P
Parking brake stroke 11-40
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking light switch 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking your vehicle 7-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic inspections 8-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power door locking switches 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power steering 7-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power steering fluid 11-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows 2-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions against vehicle modification 1-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions to observe when handling
a compact disc (CD) 5-47
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing to drive 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R
Rear combination lights 11-58
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear differential gear oil 11-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear gate 2-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear viscous limited slip differential (S models) 7-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
14
Index
14-7
Rear window defogger switch 3-26
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window wiper and washer switch (if equipped) 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement of brake pad and lining 11-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement of windshield wiper blades 11-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing bulbs 11-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting safety defects (USA) 13-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rocking the vehicle 8-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped) 8-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S
Seatbelt extender 1-23
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatbelt maintenance 1-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatbelts 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatbelt safety tips 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatbelt warning light and chime 1-12, 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat heater (if equipped) 1-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security system (if equipped) 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security system status indicator light (if equipped) 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector lever 7-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift lock release 7-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shopping bag hook 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow tires 8-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spark plugs 11-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications 12-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spotlight 6-15, 11-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbag system monitors 1-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbag system servicing 1-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbag system warning light 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS frontal airbag 1-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS side airbag (if equipped) 1-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting a flooded engine 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine during cold weather below –4 °F (–20°C) 7-9. . . . . . . .
Starting the engine for a manual transmission vehicle 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
14-8
Starting the engine for an automatic transmission vehicle 7-9
. . . . . . . . . . . .
State emission testing (U.S. only) 7-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping the engine 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun visors 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T
Tachometer 3-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature A, B, C 13-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature gauge 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt steering wheel 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire chains 8-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire changing tools 9-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire inspection 11-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire pressures and wear 11-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire replacement 11-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire rotation 11-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires 12-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires and wheels 11-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top tether anchorages 1-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing 9-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction AA, A, B, C 13-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing 8-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Treadwear 13-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn signal indicator lights 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn signals lever 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type A audio set (if equipped) 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type B audio set (if equipped) 5-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type C audio set (if equipped) 5-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of tires 11-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
U
Under floor storage tray 6-19
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uniform tire quality grading standards 13-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
14
Index
14-9
V
Vanity mirror (if equipped) 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle capacity weight 8-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle identification 12-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle with driver’s and front passenger’s SRS airbags and
lap/shoulder restraints 1-31
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilator 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W
Warning and indicator lights 3-9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing 10-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waxing and polishing 10-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wear indicators 11-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel alignment 12-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel balance 11-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel replacement 11-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield washer fluid 11-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and washer switches 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving 8-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiper and washer 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORESTER (NA) A8050BE–A (ENG.)
13-4
Reporting safety defects (USA)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately in-
form the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying Subaru of America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of ve-
hicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Subaru of America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,
you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
